]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/gcc.git/blame - gcc/cse.c
(PRINT_OPERAND): For SFmode, use 0f, not 0d or 0g.
[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / cse.c
CommitLineData
7afe21cc
RK
1/* Common subexpression elimination for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3
4This file is part of GNU CC.
5
6GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
7it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
8the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
9any later version.
10
11GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
12but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
13MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
14GNU General Public License for more details.
15
16You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to
18the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. */
19
20
21#include "config.h"
22#include "rtl.h"
23#include "regs.h"
24#include "hard-reg-set.h"
25#include "flags.h"
26#include "real.h"
27#include "insn-config.h"
28#include "recog.h"
29
30#include <stdio.h>
31#include <setjmp.h>
32
33/* The basic idea of common subexpression elimination is to go
34 through the code, keeping a record of expressions that would
35 have the same value at the current scan point, and replacing
36 expressions encountered with the cheapest equivalent expression.
37
38 It is too complicated to keep track of the different possibilities
39 when control paths merge; so, at each label, we forget all that is
40 known and start fresh. This can be described as processing each
41 basic block separately. Note, however, that these are not quite
42 the same as the basic blocks found by a later pass and used for
43 data flow analysis and register packing. We do not need to start fresh
44 after a conditional jump instruction if there is no label there.
45
46 We use two data structures to record the equivalent expressions:
47 a hash table for most expressions, and several vectors together
48 with "quantity numbers" to record equivalent (pseudo) registers.
49
50 The use of the special data structure for registers is desirable
51 because it is faster. It is possible because registers references
52 contain a fairly small number, the register number, taken from
53 a contiguously allocated series, and two register references are
54 identical if they have the same number. General expressions
55 do not have any such thing, so the only way to retrieve the
56 information recorded on an expression other than a register
57 is to keep it in a hash table.
58
59Registers and "quantity numbers":
60
61 At the start of each basic block, all of the (hardware and pseudo)
62 registers used in the function are given distinct quantity
63 numbers to indicate their contents. During scan, when the code
64 copies one register into another, we copy the quantity number.
65 When a register is loaded in any other way, we allocate a new
66 quantity number to describe the value generated by this operation.
67 `reg_qty' records what quantity a register is currently thought
68 of as containing.
69
70 All real quantity numbers are greater than or equal to `max_reg'.
71 If register N has not been assigned a quantity, reg_qty[N] will equal N.
72
73 Quantity numbers below `max_reg' do not exist and none of the `qty_...'
74 variables should be referenced with an index below `max_reg'.
75
76 We also maintain a bidirectional chain of registers for each
77 quantity number. `qty_first_reg', `qty_last_reg',
78 `reg_next_eqv' and `reg_prev_eqv' hold these chains.
79
80 The first register in a chain is the one whose lifespan is least local.
81 Among equals, it is the one that was seen first.
82 We replace any equivalent register with that one.
83
84 If two registers have the same quantity number, it must be true that
85 REG expressions with `qty_mode' must be in the hash table for both
86 registers and must be in the same class.
87
88 The converse is not true. Since hard registers may be referenced in
89 any mode, two REG expressions might be equivalent in the hash table
90 but not have the same quantity number if the quantity number of one
91 of the registers is not the same mode as those expressions.
92
93Constants and quantity numbers
94
95 When a quantity has a known constant value, that value is stored
96 in the appropriate element of qty_const. This is in addition to
97 putting the constant in the hash table as is usual for non-regs.
98
d45cf215 99 Whether a reg or a constant is preferred is determined by the configuration
7afe21cc
RK
100 macro CONST_COSTS and will often depend on the constant value. In any
101 event, expressions containing constants can be simplified, by fold_rtx.
102
103 When a quantity has a known nearly constant value (such as an address
104 of a stack slot), that value is stored in the appropriate element
105 of qty_const.
106
107 Integer constants don't have a machine mode. However, cse
108 determines the intended machine mode from the destination
109 of the instruction that moves the constant. The machine mode
110 is recorded in the hash table along with the actual RTL
111 constant expression so that different modes are kept separate.
112
113Other expressions:
114
115 To record known equivalences among expressions in general
116 we use a hash table called `table'. It has a fixed number of buckets
117 that contain chains of `struct table_elt' elements for expressions.
118 These chains connect the elements whose expressions have the same
119 hash codes.
120
121 Other chains through the same elements connect the elements which
122 currently have equivalent values.
123
124 Register references in an expression are canonicalized before hashing
125 the expression. This is done using `reg_qty' and `qty_first_reg'.
126 The hash code of a register reference is computed using the quantity
127 number, not the register number.
128
129 When the value of an expression changes, it is necessary to remove from the
130 hash table not just that expression but all expressions whose values
131 could be different as a result.
132
133 1. If the value changing is in memory, except in special cases
134 ANYTHING referring to memory could be changed. That is because
135 nobody knows where a pointer does not point.
136 The function `invalidate_memory' removes what is necessary.
137
138 The special cases are when the address is constant or is
139 a constant plus a fixed register such as the frame pointer
140 or a static chain pointer. When such addresses are stored in,
141 we can tell exactly which other such addresses must be invalidated
142 due to overlap. `invalidate' does this.
143 All expressions that refer to non-constant
144 memory addresses are also invalidated. `invalidate_memory' does this.
145
146 2. If the value changing is a register, all expressions
147 containing references to that register, and only those,
148 must be removed.
149
150 Because searching the entire hash table for expressions that contain
151 a register is very slow, we try to figure out when it isn't necessary.
152 Precisely, this is necessary only when expressions have been
153 entered in the hash table using this register, and then the value has
154 changed, and then another expression wants to be added to refer to
155 the register's new value. This sequence of circumstances is rare
156 within any one basic block.
157
158 The vectors `reg_tick' and `reg_in_table' are used to detect this case.
159 reg_tick[i] is incremented whenever a value is stored in register i.
160 reg_in_table[i] holds -1 if no references to register i have been
161 entered in the table; otherwise, it contains the value reg_tick[i] had
162 when the references were entered. If we want to enter a reference
163 and reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i], we must scan and remove old references.
164 Until we want to enter a new entry, the mere fact that the two vectors
165 don't match makes the entries be ignored if anyone tries to match them.
166
167 Registers themselves are entered in the hash table as well as in
168 the equivalent-register chains. However, the vectors `reg_tick'
169 and `reg_in_table' do not apply to expressions which are simple
170 register references. These expressions are removed from the table
171 immediately when they become invalid, and this can be done even if
172 we do not immediately search for all the expressions that refer to
173 the register.
174
175 A CLOBBER rtx in an instruction invalidates its operand for further
176 reuse. A CLOBBER or SET rtx whose operand is a MEM:BLK
177 invalidates everything that resides in memory.
178
179Related expressions:
180
181 Constant expressions that differ only by an additive integer
182 are called related. When a constant expression is put in
183 the table, the related expression with no constant term
184 is also entered. These are made to point at each other
185 so that it is possible to find out if there exists any
186 register equivalent to an expression related to a given expression. */
187
188/* One plus largest register number used in this function. */
189
190static int max_reg;
191
192/* Length of vectors indexed by quantity number.
193 We know in advance we will not need a quantity number this big. */
194
195static int max_qty;
196
197/* Next quantity number to be allocated.
198 This is 1 + the largest number needed so far. */
199
200static int next_qty;
201
202/* Indexed by quantity number, gives the first (or last) (pseudo) register
203 in the chain of registers that currently contain this quantity. */
204
205static int *qty_first_reg;
206static int *qty_last_reg;
207
208/* Index by quantity number, gives the mode of the quantity. */
209
210static enum machine_mode *qty_mode;
211
212/* Indexed by quantity number, gives the rtx of the constant value of the
213 quantity, or zero if it does not have a known value.
214 A sum of the frame pointer (or arg pointer) plus a constant
215 can also be entered here. */
216
217static rtx *qty_const;
218
219/* Indexed by qty number, gives the insn that stored the constant value
220 recorded in `qty_const'. */
221
222static rtx *qty_const_insn;
223
224/* The next three variables are used to track when a comparison between a
225 quantity and some constant or register has been passed. In that case, we
226 know the results of the comparison in case we see it again. These variables
227 record a comparison that is known to be true. */
228
229/* Indexed by qty number, gives the rtx code of a comparison with a known
230 result involving this quantity. If none, it is UNKNOWN. */
231static enum rtx_code *qty_comparison_code;
232
233/* Indexed by qty number, gives the constant being compared against in a
234 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, it is undefined.
235 If the comparison is not with a constant, it is zero. */
236
237static rtx *qty_comparison_const;
238
239/* Indexed by qty number, gives the quantity being compared against in a
240 comparison of known result. If no such comparison, if it undefined.
241 If the comparison is not with a register, it is -1. */
242
243static int *qty_comparison_qty;
244
245#ifdef HAVE_cc0
246/* For machines that have a CC0, we do not record its value in the hash
247 table since its use is guaranteed to be the insn immediately following
248 its definition and any other insn is presumed to invalidate it.
249
250 Instead, we store below the value last assigned to CC0. If it should
251 happen to be a constant, it is stored in preference to the actual
252 assigned value. In case it is a constant, we store the mode in which
253 the constant should be interpreted. */
254
255static rtx prev_insn_cc0;
256static enum machine_mode prev_insn_cc0_mode;
257#endif
258
259/* Previous actual insn. 0 if at first insn of basic block. */
260
261static rtx prev_insn;
262
263/* Insn being scanned. */
264
265static rtx this_insn;
266
267/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the quantity number
268 of the register's current contents. */
269
270static int *reg_qty;
271
272/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of the next (or
273 previous) (pseudo) register in the chain of registers sharing the same
274 value.
275
276 Or -1 if this register is at the end of the chain.
277
278 If reg_qty[N] == N, reg_next_eqv[N] is undefined. */
279
280static int *reg_next_eqv;
281static int *reg_prev_eqv;
282
283/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the number of times
284 that register has been altered in the current basic block. */
285
286static int *reg_tick;
287
288/* Index by (pseudo) register number, gives the reg_tick value at which
289 rtx's containing this register are valid in the hash table.
290 If this does not equal the current reg_tick value, such expressions
291 existing in the hash table are invalid.
292 If this is -1, no expressions containing this register have been
293 entered in the table. */
294
295static int *reg_in_table;
296
297/* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers for which there is
298 currently a REG expression in the hash table. Note the difference
299 from the above variables, which indicate if the REG is mentioned in some
300 expression in the table. */
301
302static HARD_REG_SET hard_regs_in_table;
303
304/* A HARD_REG_SET containing all the hard registers that are invalidated
305 by a CALL_INSN. */
306
307static HARD_REG_SET regs_invalidated_by_call;
308
309/* Two vectors of ints:
310 one containing max_reg -1's; the other max_reg + 500 (an approximation
311 for max_qty) elements where element i contains i.
312 These are used to initialize various other vectors fast. */
313
314static int *all_minus_one;
315static int *consec_ints;
316
317/* CUID of insn that starts the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
318
319static int cse_basic_block_start;
320
321/* CUID of insn that ends the basic block currently being cse-processed. */
322
323static int cse_basic_block_end;
324
325/* Vector mapping INSN_UIDs to cuids.
d45cf215 326 The cuids are like uids but increase monotonically always.
7afe21cc
RK
327 We use them to see whether a reg is used outside a given basic block. */
328
329static short *uid_cuid;
330
331/* Get the cuid of an insn. */
332
333#define INSN_CUID(INSN) (uid_cuid[INSN_UID (INSN)])
334
335/* Nonzero if cse has altered conditional jump insns
336 in such a way that jump optimization should be redone. */
337
338static int cse_jumps_altered;
339
340/* canon_hash stores 1 in do_not_record
341 if it notices a reference to CC0, PC, or some other volatile
342 subexpression. */
343
344static int do_not_record;
345
346/* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_memory
347 if it notices a reference to memory within the expression being hashed. */
348
349static int hash_arg_in_memory;
350
351/* canon_hash stores 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
352 if it notices a reference to memory that's part of a structure. */
353
354static int hash_arg_in_struct;
355
356/* The hash table contains buckets which are chains of `struct table_elt's,
357 each recording one expression's information.
358 That expression is in the `exp' field.
359
360 Those elements with the same hash code are chained in both directions
361 through the `next_same_hash' and `prev_same_hash' fields.
362
363 Each set of expressions with equivalent values
364 are on a two-way chain through the `next_same_value'
365 and `prev_same_value' fields, and all point with
366 the `first_same_value' field at the first element in
367 that chain. The chain is in order of increasing cost.
368 Each element's cost value is in its `cost' field.
369
370 The `in_memory' field is nonzero for elements that
371 involve any reference to memory. These elements are removed
372 whenever a write is done to an unidentified location in memory.
373 To be safe, we assume that a memory address is unidentified unless
374 the address is either a symbol constant or a constant plus
375 the frame pointer or argument pointer.
376
377 The `in_struct' field is nonzero for elements that
378 involve any reference to memory inside a structure or array.
379
380 The `related_value' field is used to connect related expressions
381 (that differ by adding an integer).
382 The related expressions are chained in a circular fashion.
383 `related_value' is zero for expressions for which this
384 chain is not useful.
385
386 The `cost' field stores the cost of this element's expression.
387
388 The `is_const' flag is set if the element is a constant (including
389 a fixed address).
390
391 The `flag' field is used as a temporary during some search routines.
392
393 The `mode' field is usually the same as GET_MODE (`exp'), but
394 if `exp' is a CONST_INT and has no machine mode then the `mode'
395 field is the mode it was being used as. Each constant is
396 recorded separately for each mode it is used with. */
397
398
399struct table_elt
400{
401 rtx exp;
402 struct table_elt *next_same_hash;
403 struct table_elt *prev_same_hash;
404 struct table_elt *next_same_value;
405 struct table_elt *prev_same_value;
406 struct table_elt *first_same_value;
407 struct table_elt *related_value;
408 int cost;
409 enum machine_mode mode;
410 char in_memory;
411 char in_struct;
412 char is_const;
413 char flag;
414};
415
416#define HASHBITS 16
417
418/* We don't want a lot of buckets, because we rarely have very many
419 things stored in the hash table, and a lot of buckets slows
420 down a lot of loops that happen frequently. */
421#define NBUCKETS 31
422
423/* Compute hash code of X in mode M. Special-case case where X is a pseudo
424 register (hard registers may require `do_not_record' to be set). */
425
426#define HASH(X, M) \
427 (GET_CODE (X) == REG && REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER \
428 ? ((((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[REGNO (X)]) % NBUCKETS) \
429 : canon_hash (X, M) % NBUCKETS)
430
431/* Determine whether register number N is considered a fixed register for CSE.
432 It is desirable to replace other regs with fixed regs, to reduce need for
433 non-fixed hard regs.
434 A reg wins if it is either the frame pointer or designated as fixed,
435 but not if it is an overlapping register. */
436#ifdef OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
437#define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
438 (((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N]) \
439 && ! OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P ((N)))
440#else
441#define FIXED_REGNO_P(N) \
442 ((N) == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || fixed_regs[N])
443#endif
444
445/* Compute cost of X, as stored in the `cost' field of a table_elt. Fixed
446 hard registers are the cheapest with a cost of 0. Next come pseudos
447 with a cost of one and other hard registers with a cost of 2. Aside
448 from these special cases, call `rtx_cost'. */
449
450#define COST(X) \
451 (GET_CODE (X) == REG \
452 ? (REGNO (X) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1 \
453 : (FIXED_REGNO_P (REGNO (X)) \
454 && REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (X)) != NO_REGS) ? 0 \
455 : 2) \
e5f6a288 456 : rtx_cost (X, SET) * 2)
7afe21cc
RK
457
458/* Determine if the quantity number for register X represents a valid index
459 into the `qty_...' variables. */
460
461#define REGNO_QTY_VALID_P(N) (reg_qty[N] != (N))
462
463static struct table_elt *table[NBUCKETS];
464
465/* Chain of `struct table_elt's made so far for this function
466 but currently removed from the table. */
467
468static struct table_elt *free_element_chain;
469
470/* Number of `struct table_elt' structures made so far for this function. */
471
472static int n_elements_made;
473
474/* Maximum value `n_elements_made' has had so far in this compilation
475 for functions previously processed. */
476
477static int max_elements_made;
478
479/* Surviving equivalence class when two equivalence classes are merged
480 by recording the effects of a jump in the last insn. Zero if the
481 last insn was not a conditional jump. */
482
483static struct table_elt *last_jump_equiv_class;
484
485/* Set to the cost of a constant pool reference if one was found for a
486 symbolic constant. If this was found, it means we should try to
487 convert constants into constant pool entries if they don't fit in
488 the insn. */
489
490static int constant_pool_entries_cost;
491
492/* Bits describing what kind of values in memory must be invalidated
493 for a particular instruction. If all three bits are zero,
494 no memory refs need to be invalidated. Each bit is more powerful
495 than the preceding ones, and if a bit is set then the preceding
496 bits are also set.
497
498 Here is how the bits are set:
499 Pushing onto the stack invalidates only the stack pointer,
500 writing at a fixed address invalidates only variable addresses,
501 writing in a structure element at variable address
502 invalidates all but scalar variables,
503 and writing in anything else at variable address invalidates everything. */
504
505struct write_data
506{
507 int sp : 1; /* Invalidate stack pointer. */
508 int var : 1; /* Invalidate variable addresses. */
509 int nonscalar : 1; /* Invalidate all but scalar variables. */
510 int all : 1; /* Invalidate all memory refs. */
511};
512
513/* Nonzero if X has the form (PLUS frame-pointer integer). We check for
514 virtual regs here because the simplify_*_operation routines are called
515 by integrate.c, which is called before virtual register instantiation. */
516
517#define FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
518 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx || (X) == arg_pointer_rtx \
519 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
520 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
521 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
522 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
523 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
524 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
525 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)))
526
6f90e075
JW
527/* Similar, but also allows reference to the stack pointer.
528
529 This used to include FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P, however, we can't assume that
530 arg_pointer_rtx by itself is nonzero, because on at least one machine,
531 the i960, the arg pointer is zero when it is unused. */
7afe21cc
RK
532
533#define NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P(X) \
6f90e075
JW
534 ((X) == frame_pointer_rtx \
535 || (X) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
536 || (X) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx \
537 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
538 && (XEXP (X, 0) == frame_pointer_rtx \
539 || XEXP (X, 0) == arg_pointer_rtx \
540 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx \
541 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx)) \
7afe21cc
RK
542 || (X) == stack_pointer_rtx \
543 || (X) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
544 || (X) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx \
545 || (GET_CODE (X) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (X, 1)) == CONST_INT \
546 && (XEXP (X, 0) == stack_pointer_rtx \
547 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx \
548 || XEXP (X, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx)))
549
550static struct table_elt *lookup ();
551static void free_element ();
552
553static int insert_regs ();
554static void rehash_using_reg ();
555static void remove_invalid_refs ();
556static int exp_equiv_p ();
557int refers_to_p ();
558int refers_to_mem_p ();
559static void invalidate_from_clobbers ();
560static int safe_hash ();
561static int canon_hash ();
562static rtx fold_rtx ();
563static rtx equiv_constant ();
564static void record_jump_cond ();
565static void note_mem_written ();
566static int cse_rtx_addr_varies_p ();
567static enum rtx_code find_comparison_args ();
568static void cse_insn ();
569static void cse_set_around_loop ();
570\f
571/* Return an estimate of the cost of computing rtx X.
572 One use is in cse, to decide which expression to keep in the hash table.
573 Another is in rtl generation, to pick the cheapest way to multiply.
574 Other uses like the latter are expected in the future. */
575
576/* Return the right cost to give to an operation
577 to make the cost of the corresponding register-to-register instruction
578 N times that of a fast register-to-register instruction. */
579
580#define COSTS_N_INSNS(N) ((N) * 4 - 2)
581
582int
e5f6a288 583rtx_cost (x, outer_code)
7afe21cc 584 rtx x;
e5f6a288 585 enum rtx_code outer_code;
7afe21cc
RK
586{
587 register int i, j;
588 register enum rtx_code code;
589 register char *fmt;
590 register int total;
591
592 if (x == 0)
593 return 0;
594
595 /* Compute the default costs of certain things.
596 Note that RTX_COSTS can override the defaults. */
597
598 code = GET_CODE (x);
599 switch (code)
600 {
601 case MULT:
602 /* Count multiplication by 2**n as a shift,
603 because if we are considering it, we would output it as a shift. */
604 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == CONST_INT
605 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) >= 0)
606 total = 2;
607 else
608 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
609 break;
610 case DIV:
611 case UDIV:
612 case MOD:
613 case UMOD:
614 total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
615 break;
616 case USE:
617 /* Used in loop.c and combine.c as a marker. */
618 total = 0;
619 break;
538b78e7
RS
620 case ASM_OPERANDS:
621 /* We don't want these to be used in substitutions because
622 we have no way of validating the resulting insn. So assign
623 anything containing an ASM_OPERANDS a very high cost. */
624 total = 1000;
625 break;
7afe21cc
RK
626 default:
627 total = 2;
628 }
629
630 switch (code)
631 {
632 case REG:
633 return 1;
634 case SUBREG:
fc3ffe83
RK
635 /* If we can't tie these modes, make this expensive. The larger
636 the mode, the more expensive it is. */
637 if (! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (x), GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
638 return COSTS_N_INSNS (2
639 + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) / UNITS_PER_WORD);
7afe21cc
RK
640 return 2;
641#ifdef RTX_COSTS
e5f6a288 642 RTX_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
7afe21cc 643#endif
e5f6a288 644 CONST_COSTS (x, code, outer_code);
7afe21cc
RK
645 }
646
647 /* Sum the costs of the sub-rtx's, plus cost of this operation,
648 which is already in total. */
649
650 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
651 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
652 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
e5f6a288 653 total += rtx_cost (XEXP (x, i), code);
7afe21cc
RK
654 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
655 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
e5f6a288 656 total += rtx_cost (XVECEXP (x, i, j), code);
7afe21cc
RK
657
658 return total;
659}
660\f
661/* Clear the hash table and initialize each register with its own quantity,
662 for a new basic block. */
663
664static void
665new_basic_block ()
666{
667 register int i;
668
669 next_qty = max_reg;
670
671 bzero (reg_tick, max_reg * sizeof (int));
672
673 bcopy (all_minus_one, reg_in_table, max_reg * sizeof (int));
674 bcopy (consec_ints, reg_qty, max_reg * sizeof (int));
675 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (hard_regs_in_table);
676
677 /* The per-quantity values used to be initialized here, but it is
678 much faster to initialize each as it is made in `make_new_qty'. */
679
680 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
681 {
682 register struct table_elt *this, *next;
683 for (this = table[i]; this; this = next)
684 {
685 next = this->next_same_hash;
686 free_element (this);
687 }
688 }
689
690 bzero (table, sizeof table);
691
692 prev_insn = 0;
693
694#ifdef HAVE_cc0
695 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
696#endif
697}
698
699/* Say that register REG contains a quantity not in any register before
700 and initialize that quantity. */
701
702static void
703make_new_qty (reg)
704 register int reg;
705{
706 register int q;
707
708 if (next_qty >= max_qty)
709 abort ();
710
711 q = reg_qty[reg] = next_qty++;
712 qty_first_reg[q] = reg;
713 qty_last_reg[q] = reg;
714 qty_const[q] = qty_const_insn[q] = 0;
715 qty_comparison_code[q] = UNKNOWN;
716
717 reg_next_eqv[reg] = reg_prev_eqv[reg] = -1;
718}
719
720/* Make reg NEW equivalent to reg OLD.
721 OLD is not changing; NEW is. */
722
723static void
724make_regs_eqv (new, old)
725 register int new, old;
726{
727 register int lastr, firstr;
728 register int q = reg_qty[old];
729
730 /* Nothing should become eqv until it has a "non-invalid" qty number. */
731 if (! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (old))
732 abort ();
733
734 reg_qty[new] = q;
735 firstr = qty_first_reg[q];
736 lastr = qty_last_reg[q];
737
738 /* Prefer fixed hard registers to anything. Prefer pseudo regs to other
739 hard regs. Among pseudos, if NEW will live longer than any other reg
740 of the same qty, and that is beyond the current basic block,
741 make it the new canonical replacement for this qty. */
742 if (! (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (firstr))
743 /* Certain fixed registers might be of the class NO_REGS. This means
744 that not only can they not be allocated by the compiler, but
830a38ee 745 they cannot be used in substitutions or canonicalizations
7afe21cc
RK
746 either. */
747 && (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || REGNO_REG_CLASS (new) != NO_REGS)
748 && ((new < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && FIXED_REGNO_P (new))
749 || (new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
750 && (firstr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
751 || ((uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]] > cse_basic_block_end
752 || (uid_cuid[regno_first_uid[new]]
753 < cse_basic_block_start))
754 && (uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[new]]
755 > uid_cuid[regno_last_uid[firstr]]))))))
756 {
757 reg_prev_eqv[firstr] = new;
758 reg_next_eqv[new] = firstr;
759 reg_prev_eqv[new] = -1;
760 qty_first_reg[q] = new;
761 }
762 else
763 {
764 /* If NEW is a hard reg (known to be non-fixed), insert at end.
765 Otherwise, insert before any non-fixed hard regs that are at the
766 end. Registers of class NO_REGS cannot be used as an
767 equivalent for anything. */
768 while (lastr < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER && reg_prev_eqv[lastr] >= 0
769 && (REGNO_REG_CLASS (lastr) == NO_REGS || ! FIXED_REGNO_P (lastr))
770 && new >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
771 lastr = reg_prev_eqv[lastr];
772 reg_next_eqv[new] = reg_next_eqv[lastr];
773 if (reg_next_eqv[lastr] >= 0)
774 reg_prev_eqv[reg_next_eqv[lastr]] = new;
775 else
776 qty_last_reg[q] = new;
777 reg_next_eqv[lastr] = new;
778 reg_prev_eqv[new] = lastr;
779 }
780}
781
782/* Remove REG from its equivalence class. */
783
784static void
785delete_reg_equiv (reg)
786 register int reg;
787{
788 register int n = reg_next_eqv[reg];
789 register int p = reg_prev_eqv[reg];
790 register int q = reg_qty[reg];
791
792 /* If invalid, do nothing. N and P above are undefined in that case. */
793 if (q == reg)
794 return;
795
796 if (n != -1)
797 reg_prev_eqv[n] = p;
798 else
799 qty_last_reg[q] = p;
800 if (p != -1)
801 reg_next_eqv[p] = n;
802 else
803 qty_first_reg[q] = n;
804
805 reg_qty[reg] = reg;
806}
807
808/* Remove any invalid expressions from the hash table
809 that refer to any of the registers contained in expression X.
810
811 Make sure that newly inserted references to those registers
812 as subexpressions will be considered valid.
813
814 mention_regs is not called when a register itself
815 is being stored in the table.
816
817 Return 1 if we have done something that may have changed the hash code
818 of X. */
819
820static int
821mention_regs (x)
822 rtx x;
823{
824 register enum rtx_code code;
825 register int i, j;
826 register char *fmt;
827 register int changed = 0;
828
829 if (x == 0)
e5f6a288 830 return 0;
7afe21cc
RK
831
832 code = GET_CODE (x);
833 if (code == REG)
834 {
835 register int regno = REGNO (x);
836 register int endregno
837 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
838 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x)));
839 int i;
840
841 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
842 {
843 if (reg_in_table[i] >= 0 && reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
844 remove_invalid_refs (i);
845
846 reg_in_table[i] = reg_tick[i];
847 }
848
849 return 0;
850 }
851
852 /* If X is a comparison or a COMPARE and either operand is a register
853 that does not have a quantity, give it one. This is so that a later
854 call to record_jump_equiv won't cause X to be assigned a different
855 hash code and not found in the table after that call.
856
857 It is not necessary to do this here, since rehash_using_reg can
858 fix up the table later, but doing this here eliminates the need to
859 call that expensive function in the most common case where the only
860 use of the register is in the comparison. */
861
862 if (code == COMPARE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
863 {
864 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
865 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))))
866 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 0), 0, 0))
867 {
868 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 0));
869 changed = 1;
870 }
871
872 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == REG
873 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 1))))
874 if (insert_regs (XEXP (x, 1), 0, 0))
875 {
876 rehash_using_reg (XEXP (x, 1));
877 changed = 1;
878 }
879 }
880
881 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
882 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
883 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
884 changed |= mention_regs (XEXP (x, i));
885 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
886 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
887 changed |= mention_regs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
888
889 return changed;
890}
891
892/* Update the register quantities for inserting X into the hash table
893 with a value equivalent to CLASSP.
894 (If the class does not contain a REG, it is irrelevant.)
895 If MODIFIED is nonzero, X is a destination; it is being modified.
896 Note that delete_reg_equiv should be called on a register
897 before insert_regs is done on that register with MODIFIED != 0.
898
899 Nonzero value means that elements of reg_qty have changed
900 so X's hash code may be different. */
901
902static int
903insert_regs (x, classp, modified)
904 rtx x;
905 struct table_elt *classp;
906 int modified;
907{
908 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
909 {
910 register int regno = REGNO (x);
911
912 if (modified
913 || ! (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (regno)
914 && qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] == GET_MODE (x)))
915 {
916 if (classp)
917 for (classp = classp->first_same_value;
918 classp != 0;
919 classp = classp->next_same_value)
920 if (GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG
921 && GET_MODE (classp->exp) == GET_MODE (x))
922 {
923 make_regs_eqv (regno, REGNO (classp->exp));
924 return 1;
925 }
926
927 make_new_qty (regno);
928 qty_mode[reg_qty[regno]] = GET_MODE (x);
929 return 1;
930 }
931 }
c610adec
RK
932
933 /* If X is a SUBREG, we will likely be inserting the inner register in the
934 table. If that register doesn't have an assigned quantity number at
935 this point but does later, the insertion that we will be doing now will
936 not be accessible because its hash code will have changed. So assign
937 a quantity number now. */
938
939 else if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) == REG
940 && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SUBREG_REG (x))))
941 {
942 insert_regs (SUBREG_REG (x), 0, 0);
943 mention_regs (SUBREG_REG (x));
944 return 1;
945 }
7afe21cc
RK
946 else
947 return mention_regs (x);
948}
949\f
950/* Look in or update the hash table. */
951
952/* Put the element ELT on the list of free elements. */
953
954static void
955free_element (elt)
956 struct table_elt *elt;
957{
958 elt->next_same_hash = free_element_chain;
959 free_element_chain = elt;
960}
961
962/* Return an element that is free for use. */
963
964static struct table_elt *
965get_element ()
966{
967 struct table_elt *elt = free_element_chain;
968 if (elt)
969 {
970 free_element_chain = elt->next_same_hash;
971 return elt;
972 }
973 n_elements_made++;
974 return (struct table_elt *) oballoc (sizeof (struct table_elt));
975}
976
977/* Remove table element ELT from use in the table.
978 HASH is its hash code, made using the HASH macro.
979 It's an argument because often that is known in advance
980 and we save much time not recomputing it. */
981
982static void
983remove_from_table (elt, hash)
984 register struct table_elt *elt;
985 int hash;
986{
987 if (elt == 0)
988 return;
989
990 /* Mark this element as removed. See cse_insn. */
991 elt->first_same_value = 0;
992
993 /* Remove the table element from its equivalence class. */
994
995 {
996 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_value;
997 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_value;
998
999 if (next) next->prev_same_value = prev;
1000
1001 if (prev)
1002 prev->next_same_value = next;
1003 else
1004 {
1005 register struct table_elt *newfirst = next;
1006 while (next)
1007 {
1008 next->first_same_value = newfirst;
1009 next = next->next_same_value;
1010 }
1011 }
1012 }
1013
1014 /* Remove the table element from its hash bucket. */
1015
1016 {
1017 register struct table_elt *prev = elt->prev_same_hash;
1018 register struct table_elt *next = elt->next_same_hash;
1019
1020 if (next) next->prev_same_hash = prev;
1021
1022 if (prev)
1023 prev->next_same_hash = next;
1024 else if (table[hash] == elt)
1025 table[hash] = next;
1026 else
1027 {
1028 /* This entry is not in the proper hash bucket. This can happen
1029 when two classes were merged by `merge_equiv_classes'. Search
1030 for the hash bucket that it heads. This happens only very
1031 rarely, so the cost is acceptable. */
1032 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1033 if (table[hash] == elt)
1034 table[hash] = next;
1035 }
1036 }
1037
1038 /* Remove the table element from its related-value circular chain. */
1039
1040 if (elt->related_value != 0 && elt->related_value != elt)
1041 {
1042 register struct table_elt *p = elt->related_value;
1043 while (p->related_value != elt)
1044 p = p->related_value;
1045 p->related_value = elt->related_value;
1046 if (p->related_value == p)
1047 p->related_value = 0;
1048 }
1049
1050 free_element (elt);
1051}
1052
1053/* Look up X in the hash table and return its table element,
1054 or 0 if X is not in the table.
1055
1056 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1057 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1058
1059 Here we are satisfied to find an expression whose tree structure
1060 looks like X. */
1061
1062static struct table_elt *
1063lookup (x, hash, mode)
1064 rtx x;
1065 int hash;
1066 enum machine_mode mode;
1067{
1068 register struct table_elt *p;
1069
1070 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1071 if (mode == p->mode && ((x == p->exp && GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1072 || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, GET_CODE (x) != REG, 0)))
1073 return p;
1074
1075 return 0;
1076}
1077
1078/* Like `lookup' but don't care whether the table element uses invalid regs.
1079 Also ignore discrepancies in the machine mode of a register. */
1080
1081static struct table_elt *
1082lookup_for_remove (x, hash, mode)
1083 rtx x;
1084 int hash;
1085 enum machine_mode mode;
1086{
1087 register struct table_elt *p;
1088
1089 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1090 {
1091 int regno = REGNO (x);
1092 /* Don't check the machine mode when comparing registers;
1093 invalidating (REG:SI 0) also invalidates (REG:DF 0). */
1094 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1095 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
1096 && REGNO (p->exp) == regno)
1097 return p;
1098 }
1099 else
1100 {
1101 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = p->next_same_hash)
1102 if (mode == p->mode && (x == p->exp || exp_equiv_p (x, p->exp, 0, 0)))
1103 return p;
1104 }
1105
1106 return 0;
1107}
1108
1109/* Look for an expression equivalent to X and with code CODE.
1110 If one is found, return that expression. */
1111
1112static rtx
1113lookup_as_function (x, code)
1114 rtx x;
1115 enum rtx_code code;
1116{
1117 register struct table_elt *p = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, VOIDmode) % NBUCKETS,
1118 GET_MODE (x));
1119 if (p == 0)
1120 return 0;
1121
1122 for (p = p->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1123 {
1124 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == code
1125 /* Make sure this is a valid entry in the table. */
1126 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
1127 return p->exp;
1128 }
1129
1130 return 0;
1131}
1132
1133/* Insert X in the hash table, assuming HASH is its hash code
1134 and CLASSP is an element of the class it should go in
1135 (or 0 if a new class should be made).
1136 It is inserted at the proper position to keep the class in
1137 the order cheapest first.
1138
1139 MODE is the machine-mode of X, or if X is an integer constant
1140 with VOIDmode then MODE is the mode with which X will be used.
1141
1142 For elements of equal cheapness, the most recent one
1143 goes in front, except that the first element in the list
1144 remains first unless a cheaper element is added. The order of
1145 pseudo-registers does not matter, as canon_reg will be called to
830a38ee 1146 find the cheapest when a register is retrieved from the table.
7afe21cc
RK
1147
1148 The in_memory field in the hash table element is set to 0.
1149 The caller must set it nonzero if appropriate.
1150
1151 You should call insert_regs (X, CLASSP, MODIFY) before calling here,
1152 and if insert_regs returns a nonzero value
1153 you must then recompute its hash code before calling here.
1154
1155 If necessary, update table showing constant values of quantities. */
1156
1157#define CHEAPER(X,Y) ((X)->cost < (Y)->cost)
1158
1159static struct table_elt *
1160insert (x, classp, hash, mode)
1161 register rtx x;
1162 register struct table_elt *classp;
1163 int hash;
1164 enum machine_mode mode;
1165{
1166 register struct table_elt *elt;
1167
1168 /* If X is a register and we haven't made a quantity for it,
1169 something is wrong. */
1170 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
1171 abort ();
1172
1173 /* If X is a hard register, show it is being put in the table. */
1174 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1175 {
1176 int regno = REGNO (x);
1177 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1178 int i;
1179
1180 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1181 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1182 }
1183
1184
1185 /* Put an element for X into the right hash bucket. */
1186
1187 elt = get_element ();
1188 elt->exp = x;
1189 elt->cost = COST (x);
1190 elt->next_same_value = 0;
1191 elt->prev_same_value = 0;
1192 elt->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1193 elt->prev_same_hash = 0;
1194 elt->related_value = 0;
1195 elt->in_memory = 0;
1196 elt->mode = mode;
1197 elt->is_const = (CONSTANT_P (x)
1198 /* GNU C++ takes advantage of this for `this'
1199 (and other const values). */
1200 || (RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x)
1201 && GET_CODE (x) == REG
1202 && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1203 || FIXED_BASE_PLUS_P (x));
1204
1205 if (table[hash])
1206 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = elt;
1207 table[hash] = elt;
1208
1209 /* Put it into the proper value-class. */
1210 if (classp)
1211 {
1212 classp = classp->first_same_value;
1213 if (CHEAPER (elt, classp))
1214 /* Insert at the head of the class */
1215 {
1216 register struct table_elt *p;
1217 elt->next_same_value = classp;
1218 classp->prev_same_value = elt;
1219 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1220
1221 for (p = classp; p; p = p->next_same_value)
1222 p->first_same_value = elt;
1223 }
1224 else
1225 {
1226 /* Insert not at head of the class. */
1227 /* Put it after the last element cheaper than X. */
1228 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1229 for (p = classp; (next = p->next_same_value) && CHEAPER (next, elt);
1230 p = next);
1231 /* Put it after P and before NEXT. */
1232 elt->next_same_value = next;
1233 if (next)
1234 next->prev_same_value = elt;
1235 elt->prev_same_value = p;
1236 p->next_same_value = elt;
1237 elt->first_same_value = classp;
1238 }
1239 }
1240 else
1241 elt->first_same_value = elt;
1242
1243 /* If this is a constant being set equivalent to a register or a register
1244 being set equivalent to a constant, note the constant equivalence.
1245
1246 If this is a constant, it cannot be equivalent to a different constant,
1247 and a constant is the only thing that can be cheaper than a register. So
1248 we know the register is the head of the class (before the constant was
1249 inserted).
1250
1251 If this is a register that is not already known equivalent to a
1252 constant, we must check the entire class.
1253
1254 If this is a register that is already known equivalent to an insn,
1255 update `qty_const_insn' to show that `this_insn' is the latest
1256 insn making that quantity equivalent to the constant. */
1257
1258 if (elt->is_const && classp && GET_CODE (classp->exp) == REG)
1259 {
1260 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]]
1261 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]], x);
1262 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (classp->exp)]] = this_insn;
1263 }
1264
1265 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && classp && ! qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1266 {
1267 register struct table_elt *p;
1268
1269 for (p = classp; p != 0; p = p->next_same_value)
1270 {
1271 if (p->is_const)
1272 {
1273 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1274 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), p->exp);
1275 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1276 break;
1277 }
1278 }
1279 }
1280
1281 else if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1282 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
1283 qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]] = this_insn;
1284
1285 /* If this is a constant with symbolic value,
1286 and it has a term with an explicit integer value,
1287 link it up with related expressions. */
1288 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1289 {
1290 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1291 int subhash;
1292 struct table_elt *subelt, *subelt_prev;
1293
1294 if (subexp != 0)
1295 {
1296 /* Get the integer-free subexpression in the hash table. */
1297 subhash = safe_hash (subexp, mode) % NBUCKETS;
1298 subelt = lookup (subexp, subhash, mode);
1299 if (subelt == 0)
1300 subelt = insert (subexp, 0, subhash, mode);
1301 /* Initialize SUBELT's circular chain if it has none. */
1302 if (subelt->related_value == 0)
1303 subelt->related_value = subelt;
1304 /* Find the element in the circular chain that precedes SUBELT. */
1305 subelt_prev = subelt;
1306 while (subelt_prev->related_value != subelt)
1307 subelt_prev = subelt_prev->related_value;
1308 /* Put new ELT into SUBELT's circular chain just before SUBELT.
1309 This way the element that follows SUBELT is the oldest one. */
1310 elt->related_value = subelt_prev->related_value;
1311 subelt_prev->related_value = elt;
1312 }
1313 }
1314
1315 return elt;
1316}
1317\f
1318/* Given two equivalence classes, CLASS1 and CLASS2, put all the entries from
1319 CLASS2 into CLASS1. This is done when we have reached an insn which makes
1320 the two classes equivalent.
1321
1322 CLASS1 will be the surviving class; CLASS2 should not be used after this
1323 call.
1324
1325 Any invalid entries in CLASS2 will not be copied. */
1326
1327static void
1328merge_equiv_classes (class1, class2)
1329 struct table_elt *class1, *class2;
1330{
1331 struct table_elt *elt, *next, *new;
1332
1333 /* Ensure we start with the head of the classes. */
1334 class1 = class1->first_same_value;
1335 class2 = class2->first_same_value;
1336
1337 /* If they were already equal, forget it. */
1338 if (class1 == class2)
1339 return;
1340
1341 for (elt = class2; elt; elt = next)
1342 {
1343 int hash;
1344 rtx exp = elt->exp;
1345 enum machine_mode mode = elt->mode;
1346
1347 next = elt->next_same_value;
1348
1349 /* Remove old entry, make a new one in CLASS1's class.
1350 Don't do this for invalid entries as we cannot find their
1351 hash code (it also isn't necessary). */
1352 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG || exp_equiv_p (exp, exp, 1, 0))
1353 {
1354 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
1355 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
1356 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1357
1358 if (GET_CODE (exp) == REG)
1359 delete_reg_equiv (REGNO (exp));
1360
1361 remove_from_table (elt, hash);
1362
1363 if (insert_regs (exp, class1, 0))
1364 hash = HASH (exp, mode);
1365 new = insert (exp, class1, hash, mode);
1366 new->in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1367 new->in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
1368 }
1369 }
1370}
1371\f
1372/* Remove from the hash table, or mark as invalid,
1373 all expressions whose values could be altered by storing in X.
1374 X is a register, a subreg, or a memory reference with nonvarying address
1375 (because, when a memory reference with a varying address is stored in,
1376 all memory references are removed by invalidate_memory
1377 so specific invalidation is superfluous).
1378
1379 A nonvarying address may be just a register or just
1380 a symbol reference, or it may be either of those plus
1381 a numeric offset. */
1382
1383static void
1384invalidate (x)
1385 rtx x;
1386{
1387 register int i;
1388 register struct table_elt *p;
1389 register rtx base;
1390 register int start, end;
1391
1392 /* If X is a register, dependencies on its contents
1393 are recorded through the qty number mechanism.
1394 Just change the qty number of the register,
1395 mark it as invalid for expressions that refer to it,
1396 and remove it itself. */
1397
1398 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
1399 {
1400 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1401 register int hash = HASH (x, GET_MODE (x));
1402
1403 /* Remove REGNO from any quantity list it might be on and indicate
1404 that it's value might have changed. If it is a pseudo, remove its
1405 entry from the hash table.
1406
1407 For a hard register, we do the first two actions above for any
1408 additional hard registers corresponding to X. Then, if any of these
1409 registers are in the table, we must remove any REG entries that
1410 overlap these registers. */
1411
1412 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1413 reg_tick[regno]++;
1414
1415 if (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1416 remove_from_table (lookup_for_remove (x, hash, GET_MODE (x)), hash);
1417 else
1418 {
1419 int in_table = TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1420 int endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (x));
1421 int tregno, tendregno;
1422 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1423
1424 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1425
1426 for (i = regno + 1; i < endregno; i++)
1427 {
1428 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1429 CLEAR_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, i);
1430 delete_reg_equiv (i);
1431 reg_tick[i]++;
1432 }
1433
1434 if (in_table)
1435 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1436 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1437 {
1438 next = p->next_same_hash;
1439
1440 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1441 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1442 continue;
1443
1444 tregno = REGNO (p->exp);
1445 tendregno
1446 = tregno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (tregno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1447 if (tendregno > regno && tregno < endregno)
1448 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1449 }
1450 }
1451
1452 return;
1453 }
1454
1455 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1456 {
1457 if (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != REG)
1458 abort ();
1459 invalidate (SUBREG_REG (x));
1460 return;
1461 }
1462
1463 /* X is not a register; it must be a memory reference with
1464 a nonvarying address. Remove all hash table elements
1465 that refer to overlapping pieces of memory. */
1466
1467 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
1468 abort ();
1469 base = XEXP (x, 0);
1470 start = 0;
1471
1472 /* Registers with nonvarying addresses usually have constant equivalents;
1473 but the frame pointer register is also possible. */
1474 if (GET_CODE (base) == REG
1475 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (base))
1476 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] == GET_MODE (base)
1477 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]] != 0)
1478 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (base)]];
1479 else if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
1480 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT
1481 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 0)) == REG
1482 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (base, 0)))
1483 && (qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]]
1484 == GET_MODE (XEXP (base, 0)))
1485 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]])
1486 {
1487 start = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
1488 base = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (base, 0))]];
1489 }
1490
1491 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
1492 base = XEXP (base, 0);
1493 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
1494 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
1495 {
1496 start += INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
1497 base = XEXP (base, 0);
1498 }
1499
1500 end = start + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
1501 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1502 {
1503 register struct table_elt *next;
1504 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1505 {
1506 next = p->next_same_hash;
1507 if (refers_to_mem_p (p->exp, base, start, end))
1508 remove_from_table (p, i);
1509 }
1510 }
1511}
1512
1513/* Remove all expressions that refer to register REGNO,
1514 since they are already invalid, and we are about to
1515 mark that register valid again and don't want the old
1516 expressions to reappear as valid. */
1517
1518static void
1519remove_invalid_refs (regno)
1520 int regno;
1521{
1522 register int i;
1523 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1524
1525 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1526 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1527 {
1528 next = p->next_same_hash;
1529 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1530 && refers_to_regno_p (regno, regno + 1, p->exp, 0))
1531 remove_from_table (p, i);
1532 }
1533}
1534\f
1535/* Recompute the hash codes of any valid entries in the hash table that
1536 reference X, if X is a register, or SUBREG_REG (X) if X is a SUBREG.
1537
1538 This is called when we make a jump equivalence. */
1539
1540static void
1541rehash_using_reg (x)
1542 rtx x;
1543{
1544 int i;
1545 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1546 int hash;
1547
1548 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
1549 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
1550
1551 /* If X is not a register or if the register is known not to be in any
1552 valid entries in the table, we have no work to do. */
1553
1554 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG
1555 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] < 0
1556 || reg_in_table[REGNO (x)] != reg_tick[REGNO (x)])
1557 return;
1558
1559 /* Scan all hash chains looking for valid entries that mention X.
1560 If we find one and it is in the wrong hash chain, move it. We can skip
1561 objects that are registers, since they are handled specially. */
1562
1563 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1564 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1565 {
1566 next = p->next_same_hash;
1567 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG && reg_mentioned_p (x, p->exp)
538b78e7 1568 && exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)
7afe21cc
RK
1569 && i != (hash = safe_hash (p->exp, p->mode) % NBUCKETS))
1570 {
1571 if (p->next_same_hash)
1572 p->next_same_hash->prev_same_hash = p->prev_same_hash;
1573
1574 if (p->prev_same_hash)
1575 p->prev_same_hash->next_same_hash = p->next_same_hash;
1576 else
1577 table[i] = p->next_same_hash;
1578
1579 p->next_same_hash = table[hash];
1580 p->prev_same_hash = 0;
1581 if (table[hash])
1582 table[hash]->prev_same_hash = p;
1583 table[hash] = p;
1584 }
1585 }
1586}
1587\f
1588/* Remove from the hash table all expressions that reference memory,
1589 or some of them as specified by *WRITES. */
1590
1591static void
1592invalidate_memory (writes)
1593 struct write_data *writes;
1594{
1595 register int i;
1596 register struct table_elt *p, *next;
1597 int all = writes->all;
1598 int nonscalar = writes->nonscalar;
1599
1600 for (i = 0; i < NBUCKETS; i++)
1601 for (p = table[i]; p; p = next)
1602 {
1603 next = p->next_same_hash;
1604 if (p->in_memory
1605 && (all
1606 || (nonscalar && p->in_struct)
1607 || cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (p->exp)))
1608 remove_from_table (p, i);
1609 }
1610}
1611\f
1612/* Remove from the hash table any expression that is a call-clobbered
1613 register. Also update their TICK values. */
1614
1615static void
1616invalidate_for_call ()
1617{
1618 int regno, endregno;
1619 int i;
1620 int hash;
1621 struct table_elt *p, *next;
1622 int in_table = 0;
1623
1624 /* Go through all the hard registers. For each that is clobbered in
1625 a CALL_INSN, remove the register from quantity chains and update
1626 reg_tick if defined. Also see if any of these registers is currently
1627 in the table. */
1628
1629 for (regno = 0; regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; regno++)
1630 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, regno))
1631 {
1632 delete_reg_equiv (regno);
1633 if (reg_tick[regno] >= 0)
1634 reg_tick[regno]++;
1635
1636 in_table |= TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, regno);
1637 }
1638
1639 /* In the case where we have no call-clobbered hard registers in the
1640 table, we are done. Otherwise, scan the table and remove any
1641 entry that overlaps a call-clobbered register. */
1642
1643 if (in_table)
1644 for (hash = 0; hash < NBUCKETS; hash++)
1645 for (p = table[hash]; p; p = next)
1646 {
1647 next = p->next_same_hash;
1648
1649 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) != REG
1650 || REGNO (p->exp) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
1651 continue;
1652
1653 regno = REGNO (p->exp);
1654 endregno = regno + HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (p->exp));
1655
1656 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
1657 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i))
1658 {
1659 remove_from_table (p, hash);
1660 break;
1661 }
1662 }
1663}
1664\f
1665/* Given an expression X of type CONST,
1666 and ELT which is its table entry (or 0 if it
1667 is not in the hash table),
1668 return an alternate expression for X as a register plus integer.
1669 If none can be found, return 0. */
1670
1671static rtx
1672use_related_value (x, elt)
1673 rtx x;
1674 struct table_elt *elt;
1675{
1676 register struct table_elt *relt = 0;
1677 register struct table_elt *p, *q;
1678 int offset;
1679
1680 /* First, is there anything related known?
1681 If we have a table element, we can tell from that.
1682 Otherwise, must look it up. */
1683
1684 if (elt != 0 && elt->related_value != 0)
1685 relt = elt;
1686 else if (elt == 0 && GET_CODE (x) == CONST)
1687 {
1688 rtx subexp = get_related_value (x);
1689 if (subexp != 0)
1690 relt = lookup (subexp,
1691 safe_hash (subexp, GET_MODE (subexp)) % NBUCKETS,
1692 GET_MODE (subexp));
1693 }
1694
1695 if (relt == 0)
1696 return 0;
1697
1698 /* Search all related table entries for one that has an
1699 equivalent register. */
1700
1701 p = relt;
1702 while (1)
1703 {
1704 /* This loop is strange in that it is executed in two different cases.
1705 The first is when X is already in the table. Then it is searching
1706 the RELATED_VALUE list of X's class (RELT). The second case is when
1707 X is not in the table. Then RELT points to a class for the related
1708 value.
1709
1710 Ensure that, whatever case we are in, that we ignore classes that have
1711 the same value as X. */
1712
1713 if (rtx_equal_p (x, p->exp))
1714 q = 0;
1715 else
1716 for (q = p->first_same_value; q; q = q->next_same_value)
1717 if (GET_CODE (q->exp) == REG)
1718 break;
1719
1720 if (q)
1721 break;
1722
1723 p = p->related_value;
1724
1725 /* We went all the way around, so there is nothing to be found.
1726 Alternatively, perhaps RELT was in the table for some other reason
1727 and it has no related values recorded. */
1728 if (p == relt || p == 0)
1729 break;
1730 }
1731
1732 if (q == 0)
1733 return 0;
1734
1735 offset = (get_integer_term (x) - get_integer_term (p->exp));
1736 /* Note: OFFSET may be 0 if P->xexp and X are related by commutativity. */
1737 return plus_constant (q->exp, offset);
1738}
1739\f
1740/* Hash an rtx. We are careful to make sure the value is never negative.
1741 Equivalent registers hash identically.
1742 MODE is used in hashing for CONST_INTs only;
1743 otherwise the mode of X is used.
1744
1745 Store 1 in do_not_record if any subexpression is volatile.
1746
1747 Store 1 in hash_arg_in_memory if X contains a MEM rtx
1748 which does not have the RTX_UNCHANGING_P bit set.
1749 In this case, also store 1 in hash_arg_in_struct
1750 if there is a MEM rtx which has the MEM_IN_STRUCT_P bit set.
1751
1752 Note that cse_insn knows that the hash code of a MEM expression
1753 is just (int) MEM plus the hash code of the address. */
1754
1755static int
1756canon_hash (x, mode)
1757 rtx x;
1758 enum machine_mode mode;
1759{
1760 register int i, j;
1761 register int hash = 0;
1762 register enum rtx_code code;
1763 register char *fmt;
1764
1765 /* repeat is used to turn tail-recursion into iteration. */
1766 repeat:
1767 if (x == 0)
1768 return hash;
1769
1770 code = GET_CODE (x);
1771 switch (code)
1772 {
1773 case REG:
1774 {
1775 register int regno = REGNO (x);
1776
1777 /* On some machines, we can't record any non-fixed hard register,
1778 because extending its life will cause reload problems. We
1779 consider ap, fp, and sp to be fixed for this purpose.
1780 On all machines, we can't record any global registers. */
1781
1782 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1783 && (global_regs[regno]
1784#ifdef SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
1785 || (! fixed_regs[regno]
1786 && regno != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
1787 && regno != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1788 && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
1789#endif
1790 ))
1791 {
1792 do_not_record = 1;
1793 return 0;
1794 }
1795 return hash + ((int) REG << 7) + reg_qty[regno];
1796 }
1797
1798 case CONST_INT:
1799 hash += ((int) mode + ((int) CONST_INT << 7)
1800 + INTVAL (x) + (INTVAL (x) >> HASHBITS));
1801 return ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & hash;
1802
1803 case CONST_DOUBLE:
1804 /* This is like the general case, except that it only counts
1805 the integers representing the constant. */
1806 hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
1807 {
1808 int i;
1809 for (i = 2; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (CONST_DOUBLE); i++)
1810 {
1811 int tem = XINT (x, i);
1812 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1813 }
1814 }
1815 return hash;
1816
1817 /* Assume there is only one rtx object for any given label. */
1818 case LABEL_REF:
1819 /* Use `and' to ensure a positive number. */
1820 return (hash + ((int) LABEL_REF << 7)
1821 + ((int) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
1822
1823 case SYMBOL_REF:
1824 return (hash + ((int) SYMBOL_REF << 7)
1825 + ((int) XEXP (x, 0) & ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1)));
1826
1827 case MEM:
1828 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1829 {
1830 do_not_record = 1;
1831 return 0;
1832 }
1833 if (! RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x))
1834 {
1835 hash_arg_in_memory = 1;
1836 if (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x)) hash_arg_in_struct = 1;
1837 }
1838 /* Now that we have already found this special case,
1839 might as well speed it up as much as possible. */
1840 hash += (int) MEM;
1841 x = XEXP (x, 0);
1842 goto repeat;
1843
1844 case PRE_DEC:
1845 case PRE_INC:
1846 case POST_DEC:
1847 case POST_INC:
1848 case PC:
1849 case CC0:
1850 case CALL:
1851 case UNSPEC_VOLATILE:
1852 do_not_record = 1;
1853 return 0;
1854
1855 case ASM_OPERANDS:
1856 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
1857 {
1858 do_not_record = 1;
1859 return 0;
1860 }
1861 }
1862
1863 i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1;
1864 hash += (int) code + (int) GET_MODE (x);
1865 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
1866 for (; i >= 0; i--)
1867 {
1868 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
1869 {
1870 rtx tem = XEXP (x, i);
1871 rtx tem1;
1872
1873 /* If the operand is a REG that is equivalent to a constant, hash
1874 as if we were hashing the constant, since we will be comparing
1875 that way. */
1876 if (tem != 0 && GET_CODE (tem) == REG
1877 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (tem))
1878 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]] == GET_MODE (tem)
1879 && (tem1 = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (tem)]]) != 0
1880 && CONSTANT_P (tem1))
1881 tem = tem1;
1882
1883 /* If we are about to do the last recursive call
1884 needed at this level, change it into iteration.
1885 This function is called enough to be worth it. */
1886 if (i == 0)
1887 {
1888 x = tem;
1889 goto repeat;
1890 }
1891 hash += canon_hash (tem, 0);
1892 }
1893 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
1894 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
1895 hash += canon_hash (XVECEXP (x, i, j), 0);
1896 else if (fmt[i] == 's')
1897 {
1898 register char *p = XSTR (x, i);
1899 if (p)
1900 while (*p)
1901 {
1902 register int tem = *p++;
1903 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1904 }
1905 }
1906 else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
1907 {
1908 register int tem = XINT (x, i);
1909 hash += ((1 << HASHBITS) - 1) & (tem + (tem >> HASHBITS));
1910 }
1911 else
1912 abort ();
1913 }
1914 return hash;
1915}
1916
1917/* Like canon_hash but with no side effects. */
1918
1919static int
1920safe_hash (x, mode)
1921 rtx x;
1922 enum machine_mode mode;
1923{
1924 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
1925 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
1926 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
1927 int hash = canon_hash (x, mode);
1928 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
1929 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
1930 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
1931 return hash;
1932}
1933\f
1934/* Return 1 iff X and Y would canonicalize into the same thing,
1935 without actually constructing the canonicalization of either one.
1936 If VALIDATE is nonzero,
1937 we assume X is an expression being processed from the rtl
1938 and Y was found in the hash table. We check register refs
1939 in Y for being marked as valid.
1940
1941 If EQUAL_VALUES is nonzero, we allow a register to match a constant value
1942 that is known to be in the register. Ordinarily, we don't allow them
1943 to match, because letting them match would cause unpredictable results
1944 in all the places that search a hash table chain for an equivalent
1945 for a given value. A possible equivalent that has different structure
1946 has its hash code computed from different data. Whether the hash code
1947 is the same as that of the the given value is pure luck. */
1948
1949static int
1950exp_equiv_p (x, y, validate, equal_values)
1951 rtx x, y;
1952 int validate;
1953 int equal_values;
1954{
1955 register int i;
1956 register enum rtx_code code;
1957 register char *fmt;
1958
1959 /* Note: it is incorrect to assume an expression is equivalent to itself
1960 if VALIDATE is nonzero. */
1961 if (x == y && !validate)
1962 return 1;
1963 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
1964 return x == y;
1965
1966 code = GET_CODE (x);
1967 if (code != GET_CODE (y))
1968 {
1969 if (!equal_values)
1970 return 0;
1971
1972 /* If X is a constant and Y is a register or vice versa, they may be
1973 equivalent. We only have to validate if Y is a register. */
1974 if (CONSTANT_P (x) && GET_CODE (y) == REG
1975 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (y))
1976 && GET_MODE (y) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]]
1977 && rtx_equal_p (x, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (y)]])
1978 && (! validate || reg_in_table[REGNO (y)] == reg_tick[REGNO (y)]))
1979 return 1;
1980
1981 if (CONSTANT_P (y) && code == REG
1982 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
1983 && GET_MODE (x) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]
1984 && rtx_equal_p (y, qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]))
1985 return 1;
1986
1987 return 0;
1988 }
1989
1990 /* (MULT:SI x y) and (MULT:HI x y) are NOT equivalent. */
1991 if (GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
1992 return 0;
1993
1994 switch (code)
1995 {
1996 case PC:
1997 case CC0:
1998 return x == y;
1999
2000 case CONST_INT:
2001 return XINT (x, 0) == XINT (y, 0);
2002
2003 case LABEL_REF:
2004 case SYMBOL_REF:
2005 return XEXP (x, 0) == XEXP (y, 0);
2006
2007 case REG:
2008 {
2009 int regno = REGNO (y);
2010 int endregno
2011 = regno + (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? 1
2012 : HARD_REGNO_NREGS (regno, GET_MODE (y)));
2013 int i;
2014
2015 /* If the quantities are not the same, the expressions are not
2016 equivalent. If there are and we are not to validate, they
2017 are equivalent. Otherwise, ensure all regs are up-to-date. */
2018
2019 if (reg_qty[REGNO (x)] != reg_qty[regno])
2020 return 0;
2021
2022 if (! validate)
2023 return 1;
2024
2025 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
2026 if (reg_in_table[i] != reg_tick[i])
2027 return 0;
2028
2029 return 1;
2030 }
2031
2032 /* For commutative operations, check both orders. */
2033 case PLUS:
2034 case MULT:
2035 case AND:
2036 case IOR:
2037 case XOR:
2038 case NE:
2039 case EQ:
2040 return ((exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 0), validate, equal_values)
2041 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 1),
2042 validate, equal_values))
2043 || (exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (y, 1),
2044 validate, equal_values)
2045 && exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (y, 0),
2046 validate, equal_values)));
2047 }
2048
2049 /* Compare the elements. If any pair of corresponding elements
2050 fail to match, return 0 for the whole things. */
2051
2052 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2053 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2054 {
2055 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2056 {
2057 if (! exp_equiv_p (XEXP (x, i), XEXP (y, i), validate, equal_values))
2058 return 0;
2059 }
2060 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2061 {
2062 int j;
2063 if (XVECLEN (x, i) != XVECLEN (y, i))
2064 return 0;
2065 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2066 if (! exp_equiv_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), XVECEXP (y, i, j),
2067 validate, equal_values))
2068 return 0;
2069 }
2070 else if (fmt[i] == 's')
2071 {
2072 if (strcmp (XSTR (x, i), XSTR (y, i)))
2073 return 0;
2074 }
2075 else if (fmt[i] == 'i')
2076 {
2077 if (XINT (x, i) != XINT (y, i))
2078 return 0;
2079 }
2080 else if (fmt[i] != '0')
2081 abort ();
2082 }
2083 return 1;
2084}
2085\f
2086/* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X matches Y.
2087 Here we do not require that X or Y be valid (for registers referred to)
2088 for being in the hash table. */
2089
2090int
2091refers_to_p (x, y)
2092 rtx x, y;
2093{
2094 register int i;
2095 register enum rtx_code code;
2096 register char *fmt;
2097
2098 repeat:
2099 if (x == y)
2100 return 1;
2101 if (x == 0 || y == 0)
2102 return 0;
2103
2104 code = GET_CODE (x);
2105 /* If X as a whole has the same code as Y, they may match.
2106 If so, return 1. */
2107 if (code == GET_CODE (y))
2108 {
2109 if (exp_equiv_p (x, y, 0, 1))
2110 return 1;
2111 }
2112
2113 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2114
2115 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2116 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2117 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2118 {
2119 if (i == 0)
2120 {
2121 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2122 goto repeat;
2123 }
2124 else
2125 if (refers_to_p (XEXP (x, i), y))
2126 return 1;
2127 }
2128 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2129 {
2130 int j;
2131 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2132 if (refers_to_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), y))
2133 return 1;
2134 }
2135
2136 return 0;
2137}
2138\f
2139/* Return 1 iff any subexpression of X refers to memory
2140 at an address of BASE plus some offset
2141 such that any of the bytes' offsets fall between START (inclusive)
2142 and END (exclusive).
2143
2144 The value is undefined if X is a varying address.
2145 This function is not used in such cases.
2146
2147 When used in the cse pass, `qty_const' is nonzero, and it is used
2148 to treat an address that is a register with a known constant value
2149 as if it were that constant value.
2150 In the loop pass, `qty_const' is zero, so this is not done. */
2151
2152int
2153refers_to_mem_p (x, base, start, end)
2154 rtx x, base;
2155 int start, end;
2156{
2157 register int i;
2158 register enum rtx_code code;
2159 register char *fmt;
2160
2161 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST_INT)
2162 {
2163 start += INTVAL (base);
2164 end += INTVAL (base);
2165 base = const0_rtx;
2166 }
2167
2168 repeat:
2169 if (x == 0)
2170 return 0;
2171
2172 code = GET_CODE (x);
2173 if (code == MEM)
2174 {
2175 register rtx addr = XEXP (x, 0); /* Get the address. */
2176 int myend;
2177
2178 i = 0;
2179 if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
2180 /* qty_const is 0 when outside the cse pass;
2181 at such times, this info is not available. */
2182 && qty_const != 0
2183 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
2184 && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
2185 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
2186 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
2187 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2188 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
2189 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
2190 && qty_const != 0
2191 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)))
2192 && (GET_MODE (XEXP (addr, 0))
2193 == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]])
2194 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]])
2195 {
2196 i = INTVAL (XEXP (addr, 1));
2197 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0))]];
2198 }
2199
2200 check_addr:
2201 if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST)
2202 addr = XEXP (addr, 0);
2203
2204 /* If ADDR is BASE, or BASE plus an integer, put
2205 the integer in I. */
2206 if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2207 && XEXP (addr, 0) == base
2208 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2209 i += INTVAL (XEXP (addr, 1));
2210 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM)
2211 {
2212 if (GET_CODE (base) != LO_SUM)
2213 return 1;
2214 /* The REG component of the LO_SUM is known by the
2215 const value in the XEXP part. */
2216 addr = XEXP (addr, 1);
2217 base = XEXP (base, 1);
2218 i = 0;
2219 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
2220 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2221 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2222 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2223 {
2224 int tem = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
2225 start += tem;
2226 end += tem;
2227 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2228 }
2229 goto check_addr;
2230 }
2231 else if (GET_CODE (base) == LO_SUM)
2232 {
2233 base = XEXP (base, 1);
2234 if (GET_CODE (base) == CONST)
2235 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2236 if (GET_CODE (base) == PLUS
2237 && GET_CODE (XEXP (base, 1)) == CONST_INT)
2238 {
2239 int tem = INTVAL (XEXP (base, 1));
2240 start += tem;
2241 end += tem;
2242 base = XEXP (base, 0);
2243 }
2244 goto check_addr;
2245 }
2246 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST_INT && base == const0_rtx)
2247 i = INTVAL (addr);
2248 else if (addr != base)
2249 return 0;
2250
2251 myend = i + GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x));
2252 return myend > start && i < end;
2253 }
2254
2255 /* X does not match, so try its subexpressions. */
2256
2257 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2258 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2259 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2260 {
2261 if (i == 0)
2262 {
2263 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2264 goto repeat;
2265 }
2266 else
2267 if (refers_to_mem_p (XEXP (x, i), base, start, end))
2268 return 1;
2269 }
2270 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2271 {
2272 int j;
2273 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2274 if (refers_to_mem_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), base, start, end))
2275 return 1;
2276 }
2277
2278 return 0;
2279}
2280
2281/* Nonzero if X refers to memory at a varying address;
2282 except that a register which has at the moment a known constant value
2283 isn't considered variable. */
2284
2285static int
2286cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (x)
2287 rtx x;
2288{
2289 /* We need not check for X and the equivalence class being of the same
2290 mode because if X is equivalent to a constant in some mode, it
2291 doesn't vary in any mode. */
2292
2293 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2294 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
2295 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)))
2296 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]]
2297 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (x, 0))]] != 0)
2298 return 0;
2299
2300 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
2301 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
2302 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
2303 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == REG
2304 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))
2305 && (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
2306 == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2307 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))]])
2308 return 0;
2309
2310 return rtx_addr_varies_p (x);
2311}
2312\f
2313/* Canonicalize an expression:
2314 replace each register reference inside it
2315 with the "oldest" equivalent register.
2316
2317 If INSN is non-zero and we are replacing a pseudo with a hard register
2318 or vice versa, verify that INSN remains valid after we make our
2319 substitution. */
2320
2321static rtx
2322canon_reg (x, insn)
2323 rtx x;
2324 rtx insn;
2325{
2326 register int i;
2327 register enum rtx_code code;
2328 register char *fmt;
2329
2330 if (x == 0)
2331 return x;
2332
2333 code = GET_CODE (x);
2334 switch (code)
2335 {
2336 case PC:
2337 case CC0:
2338 case CONST:
2339 case CONST_INT:
2340 case CONST_DOUBLE:
2341 case SYMBOL_REF:
2342 case LABEL_REF:
2343 case ADDR_VEC:
2344 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
2345 return x;
2346
2347 case REG:
2348 {
2349 register int first;
2350
2351 /* Never replace a hard reg, because hard regs can appear
2352 in more than one machine mode, and we must preserve the mode
2353 of each occurrence. Also, some hard regs appear in
2354 MEMs that are shared and mustn't be altered. Don't try to
2355 replace any reg that maps to a reg of class NO_REGS. */
2356 if (REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2357 || ! REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x)))
2358 return x;
2359
2360 first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]];
2361 return (first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
2362 : REGNO_REG_CLASS (first) == NO_REGS ? x
2363 : gen_rtx (REG, qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]], first));
2364 }
2365 }
2366
2367 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
2368 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2369 {
2370 register int j;
2371
2372 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
2373 {
2374 rtx new = canon_reg (XEXP (x, i), insn);
2375
2376 /* If replacing pseudo with hard reg or vice versa, ensure the
178c39f6 2377 insn remains valid. Likewise if the insn has MATCH_DUPs. */
7afe21cc 2378 if (new && GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, i)) == REG
178c39f6
RK
2379 && (((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2380 != (REGNO (XEXP (x, i)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
2381 || (insn != 0 && insn_n_dups[recog_memoized (insn)] > 0)))
77fa0940 2382 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), new, 1);
7afe21cc
RK
2383 else
2384 XEXP (x, i) = new;
2385 }
2386 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
2387 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
2388 XVECEXP (x, i, j) = canon_reg (XVECEXP (x, i, j), insn);
2389 }
2390
2391 return x;
2392}
2393\f
2394/* LOC is a location with INSN that is an operand address (the contents of
2395 a MEM). Find the best equivalent address to use that is valid for this
2396 insn.
2397
2398 On most CISC machines, complicated address modes are costly, and rtx_cost
2399 is a good approximation for that cost. However, most RISC machines have
2400 only a few (usually only one) memory reference formats. If an address is
2401 valid at all, it is often just as cheap as any other address. Hence, for
2402 RISC machines, we use the configuration macro `ADDRESS_COST' to compare the
2403 costs of various addresses. For two addresses of equal cost, choose the one
2404 with the highest `rtx_cost' value as that has the potential of eliminating
2405 the most insns. For equal costs, we choose the first in the equivalence
2406 class. Note that we ignore the fact that pseudo registers are cheaper
2407 than hard registers here because we would also prefer the pseudo registers.
2408 */
2409
2410void
2411find_best_addr (insn, loc)
2412 rtx insn;
2413 rtx *loc;
2414{
2415 struct table_elt *elt, *p;
2416 rtx addr = *loc;
2417 int our_cost;
2418 int found_better = 1;
2419 int save_do_not_record = do_not_record;
2420 int save_hash_arg_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
2421 int save_hash_arg_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
2422 int hash_code;
2423 int addr_volatile;
2424 int regno;
2425
2426 /* Do not try to replace constant addresses or addresses of local and
2427 argument slots. These MEM expressions are made only once and inserted
2428 in many instructions, as well as being used to control symbol table
2429 output. It is not safe to clobber them.
2430
2431 There are some uncommon cases where the address is already in a register
2432 for some reason, but we cannot take advantage of that because we have
2433 no easy way to unshare the MEM. In addition, looking up all stack
2434 addresses is costly. */
2435 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
2436 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
2437 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
2438 && (regno = REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)),
2439 regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
2440 || (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
2441 && (regno = REGNO (addr),
2442 regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM || regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM))
2443 || CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr))
2444 return;
2445
2446 /* If this address is not simply a register, try to fold it. This will
2447 sometimes simplify the expression. Many simplifications
2448 will not be valid, but some, usually applying the associative rule, will
2449 be valid and produce better code. */
2450 if (GET_CODE (addr) != REG
2451 && validate_change (insn, loc, fold_rtx (addr, insn), 0))
2452 addr = *loc;
2453
42495ca0
RK
2454 /* If this address is not in the hash table, we can't look for equivalences
2455 of the whole address. Also, ignore if volatile. */
2456
7afe21cc
RK
2457 do_not_record = 0;
2458 hash_code = HASH (addr, Pmode);
2459 addr_volatile = do_not_record;
2460 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2461 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2462 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2463
2464 if (addr_volatile)
2465 return;
2466
2467 elt = lookup (addr, hash_code, Pmode);
2468
7afe21cc 2469#ifndef ADDRESS_COST
42495ca0
RK
2470 if (elt)
2471 {
2472 our_cost = elt->cost;
2473
2474 /* Find the lowest cost below ours that works. */
2475 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
2476 if (elt->cost < our_cost
2477 && (GET_CODE (elt->exp) == REG
2478 || exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
2479 && validate_change (insn, loc,
2480 canon_reg (copy_rtx (elt->exp), 0), 0))
2481 return;
2482 }
2483#else
7afe21cc 2484
42495ca0
RK
2485 if (elt)
2486 {
2487 /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry
2488 in the class that is valid. We use the `flag' field to indicate
2489 choices that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better
2490 one that hasn't already been tried. */
7afe21cc 2491
42495ca0
RK
2492 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2493 p->flag = 0;
7afe21cc 2494
42495ca0
RK
2495 while (found_better)
2496 {
2497 int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
2498 int best_rtx_cost = (elt->cost + 1) >> 1;
2499 struct table_elt *best_elt = elt;
2500
2501 found_better = 0;
2502 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2503 if (! p->flag
2504 && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
2505 || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2506 && (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) < best_addr_cost
2507 || (ADDRESS_COST (p->exp) == best_addr_cost
2508 && (p->cost + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
2509 {
2510 found_better = 1;
2511 best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (p->exp);
2512 best_rtx_cost = (p->cost + 1) >> 1;
2513 best_elt = p;
2514 }
7afe21cc 2515
42495ca0
RK
2516 if (found_better)
2517 {
2518 if (validate_change (insn, loc,
2519 canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_elt->exp), 0), 0))
2520 return;
2521 else
2522 best_elt->flag = 1;
2523 }
2524 }
2525 }
7afe21cc 2526
42495ca0
RK
2527 /* If the address is a binary operation with the first operand a register
2528 and the second a constant, do the same as above, but looking for
2529 equivalences of the register. Then try to simplify before checking for
2530 the best address to use. This catches a few cases: First is when we
2531 have REG+const and the register is another REG+const. We can often merge
2532 the constants and eliminate one insn and one register. It may also be
2533 that a machine has a cheap REG+REG+const. Finally, this improves the
2534 code on the Alpha for unaligned byte stores. */
2535
2536 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
2537 && (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*loc)) == '2'
2538 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (*loc)) == 'c')
2539 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*loc, 0)) == REG
2540 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*loc, 1)) == CONST_INT)
7afe21cc 2541 {
42495ca0
RK
2542 rtx c = XEXP (*loc, 1);
2543
2544 do_not_record = 0;
2545 hash_code = HASH (XEXP (*loc, 0), Pmode);
2546 do_not_record = save_do_not_record;
2547 hash_arg_in_memory = save_hash_arg_in_memory;
2548 hash_arg_in_struct = save_hash_arg_in_struct;
2549
2550 elt = lookup (XEXP (*loc, 0), hash_code, Pmode);
2551 if (elt == 0)
2552 return;
2553
2554 /* We need to find the best (under the criteria documented above) entry
2555 in the class that is valid. We use the `flag' field to indicate
2556 choices that were invalid and iterate until we can't find a better
2557 one that hasn't already been tried. */
7afe21cc 2558
7afe21cc 2559 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
42495ca0 2560 p->flag = 0;
7afe21cc 2561
42495ca0 2562 while (found_better)
7afe21cc 2563 {
42495ca0
RK
2564 int best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (*loc);
2565 int best_rtx_cost = (COST (*loc) + 1) >> 1;
2566 struct table_elt *best_elt = elt;
2567 rtx best_rtx = *loc;
2568
2569 found_better = 0;
2570 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2571 if (! p->flag
2572 && (GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
2573 || exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0)))
2574 {
2575 rtx new = simplify_binary_operation (GET_CODE (*loc), Pmode,
2576 p->exp, c);
2577
2578 if (new == 0)
2579 new = gen_rtx (GET_CODE (*loc), Pmode, p->exp, c);
2580
2581 if ((ADDRESS_COST (new) < best_addr_cost
2582 || (ADDRESS_COST (new) == best_addr_cost
2583 && (COST (new) + 1) >> 1 > best_rtx_cost)))
2584 {
2585 found_better = 1;
2586 best_addr_cost = ADDRESS_COST (new);
2587 best_rtx_cost = (COST (new) + 1) >> 1;
2588 best_elt = p;
2589 best_rtx = new;
2590 }
2591 }
2592
2593 if (found_better)
2594 {
2595 if (validate_change (insn, loc,
2596 canon_reg (copy_rtx (best_rtx), 0), 0))
2597 return;
2598 else
2599 best_elt->flag = 1;
2600 }
7afe21cc
RK
2601 }
2602 }
2603#endif
2604}
2605\f
2606/* Given an operation (CODE, *PARG1, *PARG2), where code is a comparison
2607 operation (EQ, NE, GT, etc.), follow it back through the hash table and
2608 what values are being compared.
2609
2610 *PARG1 and *PARG2 are updated to contain the rtx representing the values
2611 actually being compared. For example, if *PARG1 was (cc0) and *PARG2
2612 was (const_int 0), *PARG1 and *PARG2 will be set to the objects that were
2613 compared to produce cc0.
2614
2615 The return value is the comparison operator and is either the code of
2616 A or the code corresponding to the inverse of the comparison. */
2617
2618static enum rtx_code
2619find_comparison_args (code, parg1, parg2)
2620 enum rtx_code code;
2621 rtx *parg1, *parg2;
2622{
2623 rtx arg1, arg2;
2624
2625 arg1 = *parg1, arg2 = *parg2;
2626
2627 /* If ARG2 is const0_rtx, see what ARG1 is equivalent to. */
2628
2629 while (arg2 == const0_rtx)
2630 {
2631 /* Set non-zero when we find something of interest. */
2632 rtx x = 0;
2633 int reverse_code = 0;
2634 struct table_elt *p = 0;
2635
2636 /* If arg1 is a COMPARE, extract the comparison arguments from it.
2637 On machines with CC0, this is the only case that can occur, since
2638 fold_rtx will return the COMPARE or item being compared with zero
2639 when given CC0. */
2640
2641 if (GET_CODE (arg1) == COMPARE && arg2 == const0_rtx)
2642 x = arg1;
2643
2644 /* If ARG1 is a comparison operator and CODE is testing for
2645 STORE_FLAG_VALUE, get the inner arguments. */
2646
2647 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (arg1)) == '<')
2648 {
c610adec
RK
2649 if (code == NE
2650 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2651 && code == LT && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2652#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2653 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_FLOAT
2654 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2655#endif
2656 )
7afe21cc 2657 x = arg1;
c610adec
RK
2658 else if (code == EQ
2659 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_INT
2660 && code == GE && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
2661#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2662 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (arg1)) == MODE_FLOAT
2663 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2664#endif
2665 )
7afe21cc
RK
2666 x = arg1, reverse_code = 1;
2667 }
2668
2669 /* ??? We could also check for
2670
2671 (ne (and (eq (...) (const_int 1))) (const_int 0))
2672
2673 and related forms, but let's wait until we see them occurring. */
2674
2675 if (x == 0)
2676 /* Look up ARG1 in the hash table and see if it has an equivalence
2677 that lets us see what is being compared. */
2678 p = lookup (arg1, safe_hash (arg1, GET_MODE (arg1)) % NBUCKETS,
2679 GET_MODE (arg1));
2680 if (p) p = p->first_same_value;
2681
2682 for (; p; p = p->next_same_value)
2683 {
2684 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (p->exp);
2685
2686 /* If the entry isn't valid, skip it. */
2687 if (! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
2688 continue;
2689
2690 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == COMPARE
2691 /* Another possibility is that this machine has a compare insn
2692 that includes the comparison code. In that case, ARG1 would
2693 be equivalent to a comparison operation that would set ARG1 to
2694 either STORE_FLAG_VALUE or zero. If this is an NE operation,
2695 ORIG_CODE is the actual comparison being done; if it is an EQ,
2696 we must reverse ORIG_CODE. On machine with a negative value
2697 for STORE_FLAG_VALUE, also look at LT and GE operations. */
2698 || ((code == NE
2699 || (code == LT
c610adec 2700 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
7afe21cc
RK
2701 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
2702 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
c610adec
RK
2703 & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
2704#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2705 || (code == LT
2706 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_FLOAT
2707 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2708#endif
2709 )
7afe21cc
RK
2710 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<'))
2711 {
2712 x = p->exp;
2713 break;
2714 }
2715 else if ((code == EQ
2716 || (code == GE
c610adec 2717 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_INT
7afe21cc
RK
2718 && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
2719 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE
c610adec
RK
2720 & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode) - 1))))
2721#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
2722 || (code == GE
2723 && GET_MODE_CLASS (inner_mode) == MODE_FLOAT
2724 && FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE < 0)
2725#endif
2726 )
7afe21cc
RK
2727 && GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p->exp)) == '<')
2728 {
2729 reverse_code = 1;
2730 x = p->exp;
2731 break;
2732 }
2733
2734 /* If this is fp + constant, the equivalent is a better operand since
2735 it may let us predict the value of the comparison. */
2736 else if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (p->exp))
2737 {
2738 arg1 = p->exp;
2739 continue;
2740 }
2741 }
2742
2743 /* If we didn't find a useful equivalence for ARG1, we are done.
2744 Otherwise, set up for the next iteration. */
2745 if (x == 0)
2746 break;
2747
2748 arg1 = XEXP (x, 0), arg2 = XEXP (x, 1);
2749 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x)) == '<')
2750 code = GET_CODE (x);
2751
2752 if (reverse_code)
2753 code = reverse_condition (code);
2754 }
2755
2756 /* Return our results. */
2757 *parg1 = fold_rtx (arg1, 0), *parg2 = fold_rtx (arg2, 0);
2758
2759 return code;
2760}
2761\f
2762/* Try to simplify a unary operation CODE whose output mode is to be
2763 MODE with input operand OP whose mode was originally OP_MODE.
2764 Return zero if no simplification can be made. */
2765
2766rtx
2767simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, op, op_mode)
2768 enum rtx_code code;
2769 enum machine_mode mode;
2770 rtx op;
2771 enum machine_mode op_mode;
2772{
2773 register int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
2774
2775 /* The order of these tests is critical so that, for example, we don't
2776 check the wrong mode (input vs. output) for a conversion operation,
2777 such as FIX. At some point, this should be simplified. */
2778
2779#if !defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
2780 if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2781 {
2782 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2783
2784#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2785 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), INTVAL (op) < 0 ? ~0 : 0);
2786#else
2787 d = (double) INTVAL (op);
2788#endif
2789 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2790 }
2791 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT)
2792 {
2793 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2794
2795#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2796 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, INTVAL (op), 0);
2797#else
2798 d = (double) (unsigned int) INTVAL (op);
2799#endif
2800 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2801 }
2802
2803 else if (code == FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2804 && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
2805 {
2806 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2807
2808#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2809 REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2810#else
2811 if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) < 0)
2812 {
2813 d = (double) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2814 d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
2815 * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
2816 d += (double) (unsigned) (~ CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op));
2817 d = (- d - 1.0);
2818 }
2819 else
2820 {
2821 d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2822 d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
2823 * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
2824 d += (double) (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
2825 }
2826#endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2827 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2828 }
2829 else if (code == UNSIGNED_FLOAT && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
2830 && GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
2831 {
2832 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
2833
2834#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
2835 REAL_VALUE_FROM_UNSIGNED_INT (d, CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op),
2836 CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op));
2837#else
2838 d = (double) CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2839 d *= ((double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2))
2840 * (double) (1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_INT / 2)));
2841 d += (double) (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op);
2842#endif /* REAL_ARITHMETIC */
2843 return CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode);
2844 }
2845#endif
2846
2847 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
2848 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && width > 0)
2849 {
2850 register int arg0 = INTVAL (op);
2851 register int val;
2852
2853 switch (code)
2854 {
2855 case NOT:
2856 val = ~ arg0;
2857 break;
2858
2859 case NEG:
2860 val = - arg0;
2861 break;
2862
2863 case ABS:
2864 val = (arg0 >= 0 ? arg0 : - arg0);
2865 break;
2866
2867 case FFS:
2868 /* Don't use ffs here. Instead, get low order bit and then its
2869 number. If arg0 is zero, this will return 0, as desired. */
2870 arg0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
2871 val = exact_log2 (arg0 & (- arg0)) + 1;
2872 break;
2873
2874 case TRUNCATE:
2875 val = arg0;
2876 break;
2877
2878 case ZERO_EXTEND:
2879 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
2880 op_mode = mode;
2881 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2882 val = arg0;
2883 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2884 val = arg0 & ~((-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
2885 else
2886 return 0;
2887 break;
2888
2889 case SIGN_EXTEND:
2890 if (op_mode == VOIDmode)
2891 op_mode = mode;
2892 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) == HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2893 val = arg0;
2894 else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2895 {
2896 val = arg0 & ~((-1) << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode));
2897 if (val & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1)))
2898 val -= 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
2899 }
2900 else
2901 return 0;
2902 break;
2903
d45cf215
RS
2904 case SQRT:
2905 return 0;
2906
7afe21cc
RK
2907 default:
2908 abort ();
2909 }
2910
2911 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
2912 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
2913 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
2914 unsigned value for this mode. */
2915 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
2916 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
2917 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
2918
2919 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
2920 }
2921
2922 /* We can do some operations on integer CONST_DOUBLEs. Also allow
2923 for a DImode operation on a CONST_INT. */
2924 else if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode
2925 && (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT))
2926 {
2927 int l1, h1, lv, hv;
2928
2929 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
2930 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op);
2931 else
2932 l1 = INTVAL (op), h1 = l1 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
2933
2934 switch (code)
2935 {
2936 case NOT:
2937 lv = ~ l1;
2938 hv = ~ h1;
2939 break;
2940
2941 case NEG:
2942 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
2943 break;
2944
2945 case ABS:
2946 if (h1 < 0)
2947 neg_double (l1, h1, &lv, &hv);
2948 else
2949 lv = l1, hv = h1;
2950 break;
2951
2952 case FFS:
2953 hv = 0;
2954 if (l1 == 0)
2955 lv = HOST_BITS_PER_INT + exact_log2 (h1 & (-h1)) + 1;
2956 else
2957 lv = exact_log2 (l1 & (-l1)) + 1;
2958 break;
2959
2960 case TRUNCATE:
2961 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2962 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode));
2963 else
2964 return 0;
2965 break;
2966
f72aed24
RS
2967 case ZERO_EXTEND:
2968 if (op_mode == VOIDmode
2969 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2970 return 0;
2971
2972 hv = 0;
2973 lv = l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
2974 break;
2975
2976 case SIGN_EXTEND:
2977 if (op_mode == VOIDmode
2978 || GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
2979 return 0;
2980 else
2981 {
2982 lv = l1 & GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
2983 if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
2984 && (lv & (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode) - 1))) != 0)
2985 lv -= 1 << GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op_mode);
2986
2987 hv = (lv < 0) ? ~0 : 0;
2988 }
2989 break;
2990
d45cf215
RS
2991 case SQRT:
2992 return 0;
2993
7afe21cc
RK
2994 default:
2995 return 0;
2996 }
2997
2998 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
2999 }
3000
3001#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3002 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
3003 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
3004 {
3005 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3006 jmp_buf handler;
3007 rtx x;
3008
3009 if (setjmp (handler))
3010 /* There used to be a warning here, but that is inadvisable.
3011 People may want to cause traps, and the natural way
3012 to do it should not get a warning. */
3013 return 0;
3014
3015 set_float_handler (handler);
3016
3017 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
3018
3019 switch (code)
3020 {
3021 case NEG:
3022 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
3023 break;
3024
3025 case ABS:
8b3686ed 3026 if (REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (d))
7afe21cc
RK
3027 d = REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (d);
3028 break;
3029
3030 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
5352b11a 3031 d = (double) real_value_truncate (mode, d);
7afe21cc
RK
3032 break;
3033
3034 case FLOAT_EXTEND:
3035 /* All this does is change the mode. */
3036 break;
3037
3038 case FIX:
3039 d = (double) REAL_VALUE_FIX_TRUNCATE (d);
3040 break;
3041
3042 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
3043 d = (double) REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX_TRUNCATE (d);
3044 break;
3045
d45cf215
RS
3046 case SQRT:
3047 return 0;
3048
7afe21cc
RK
3049 default:
3050 abort ();
3051 }
3052
3053 x = immed_real_const_1 (d, mode);
3054 set_float_handler (0);
3055 return x;
3056 }
3057 else if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
3058 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && width > 0)
3059 {
3060 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3061 jmp_buf handler;
3062 rtx x;
3063 int val;
3064
3065 if (setjmp (handler))
3066 return 0;
3067
3068 set_float_handler (handler);
3069
3070 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op);
3071
3072 switch (code)
3073 {
3074 case FIX:
3075 val = REAL_VALUE_FIX (d);
3076 break;
3077
3078 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
3079 val = REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (d);
3080 break;
3081
3082 default:
3083 abort ();
3084 }
3085
3086 set_float_handler (0);
3087
3088 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
3089 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
3090 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
3091 unsigned value for this mode. */
3092 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3093 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
3094 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
3095
3096 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
3097 }
3098#endif
a6acbe15
RS
3099 /* This was formerly used only for non-IEEE float.
3100 eggert@twinsun.com says it is safe for IEEE also. */
3101 else
7afe21cc
RK
3102 {
3103 /* There are some simplifications we can do even if the operands
a6acbe15 3104 aren't constant. */
7afe21cc
RK
3105 switch (code)
3106 {
3107 case NEG:
3108 case NOT:
3109 /* (not (not X)) == X, similarly for NEG. */
3110 if (GET_CODE (op) == code)
3111 return XEXP (op, 0);
3112 break;
3113
3114 case SIGN_EXTEND:
3115 /* (sign_extend (truncate (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2))))
3116 becomes just the MINUS if its mode is MODE. This allows
3117 folding switch statements on machines using casesi (such as
3118 the Vax). */
3119 if (GET_CODE (op) == TRUNCATE
3120 && GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == mode
3121 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == MINUS
3122 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 0)) == LABEL_REF
3123 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 0), 1)) == LABEL_REF)
3124 return XEXP (op, 0);
3125 break;
3126 }
3127
3128 return 0;
3129 }
7afe21cc
RK
3130}
3131\f
3132/* Simplify a binary operation CODE with result mode MODE, operating on OP0
3133 and OP1. Return 0 if no simplification is possible.
3134
3135 Don't use this for relational operations such as EQ or LT.
3136 Use simplify_relational_operation instead. */
3137
3138rtx
3139simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
3140 enum rtx_code code;
3141 enum machine_mode mode;
3142 rtx op0, op1;
3143{
3144 register int arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
3145 int val;
3146 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
3147
3148 /* Relational operations don't work here. We must know the mode
3149 of the operands in order to do the comparison correctly.
3150 Assuming a full word can give incorrect results.
3151 Consider comparing 128 with -128 in QImode. */
3152
3153 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '<')
3154 abort ();
3155
3156#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3157 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
3158 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3159 && mode == GET_MODE (op0) && mode == GET_MODE (op1))
3160 {
3161 REAL_VALUE_TYPE f0, f1, value;
3162 jmp_buf handler;
3163
3164 if (setjmp (handler))
3165 return 0;
3166
3167 set_float_handler (handler);
3168
3169 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f0, op0);
3170 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (f1, op1);
5352b11a
RS
3171 f0 = real_value_truncate (mode, f0);
3172 f1 = real_value_truncate (mode, f1);
7afe21cc
RK
3173
3174#ifdef REAL_ARITHMETIC
3175 REAL_ARITHMETIC (value, code, f0, f1);
3176#else
3177 switch (code)
3178 {
3179 case PLUS:
3180 value = f0 + f1;
3181 break;
3182 case MINUS:
3183 value = f0 - f1;
3184 break;
3185 case MULT:
3186 value = f0 * f1;
3187 break;
3188 case DIV:
3189#ifndef REAL_INFINITY
3190 if (f1 == 0)
3191 abort ();
3192#endif
3193 value = f0 / f1;
3194 break;
3195 case SMIN:
3196 value = MIN (f0, f1);
3197 break;
3198 case SMAX:
3199 value = MAX (f0, f1);
3200 break;
3201 default:
3202 abort ();
3203 }
3204#endif
3205
3206 set_float_handler (0);
5352b11a 3207 value = real_value_truncate (mode, value);
7afe21cc
RK
3208 return immed_real_const_1 (value, mode);
3209 }
3210
3211 /* We can fold some multi-word operations. */
3212 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
3213 && GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
3214 && (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE || GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT))
3215 {
3216 int l1, l2, h1, h2, lv, hv;
3217
3218 l1 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op0), h1 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op0);
3219
3220 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
3221 l2 = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1), h2 = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
3222 else
3223 l2 = INTVAL (op1), h2 = l2 < 0 ? -1 : 0;
3224
3225 switch (code)
3226 {
3227 case MINUS:
3228 /* A - B == A + (-B). */
3229 neg_double (l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3230 l2 = lv, h2 = hv;
3231
3232 /* .. fall through ... */
3233
3234 case PLUS:
3235 add_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3236 break;
3237
3238 case MULT:
3239 mul_double (l1, h1, l2, h2, &lv, &hv);
3240 break;
3241
3242 case DIV: case MOD: case UDIV: case UMOD:
3243 /* We'd need to include tree.h to do this and it doesn't seem worth
3244 it. */
3245 return 0;
3246
3247 case AND:
3248 lv = l1 & l2, hv = h1 & h2;
3249 break;
3250
3251 case IOR:
3252 lv = l1 | l2, hv = h1 | h2;
3253 break;
3254
3255 case XOR:
3256 lv = l1 ^ l2, hv = h1 ^ h2;
3257 break;
3258
3259 case SMIN:
3260 if (h1 < h2 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 < (unsigned) l2))
3261 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3262 else
3263 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3264 break;
3265
3266 case SMAX:
3267 if (h1 > h2 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 > (unsigned) l2))
3268 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3269 else
3270 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3271 break;
3272
3273 case UMIN:
3274 if ((unsigned) h1 < (unsigned) h2
3275 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 < (unsigned) l2))
3276 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3277 else
3278 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3279 break;
3280
3281 case UMAX:
3282 if ((unsigned) h1 > (unsigned) h2
3283 || (h1 == h2 && (unsigned) l1 > (unsigned) l2))
3284 lv = l1, hv = h1;
3285 else
3286 lv = l2, hv = h2;
3287 break;
3288
3289 case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
3290 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFT:
3291 case ROTATE: case ROTATERT:
3292#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3293 l2 &= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1), h2 = 0;
3294#endif
3295
3296 if (h2 != 0 || l2 < 0 || l2 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
3297 return 0;
3298
3299 if (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
3300 rshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
3301 code == ASHIFTRT);
3302 else if (code == ASHIFT || code == LSHIFT)
3303 lshift_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv,
3304 code == ASHIFT);
3305 else if (code == ROTATE)
3306 lrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3307 else /* code == ROTATERT */
3308 rrotate_double (l1, h1, l2, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode), &lv, &hv);
3309 break;
3310
3311 default:
3312 return 0;
3313 }
3314
3315 return immed_double_const (lv, hv, mode);
3316 }
3317#endif /* not REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE, or REAL_ARITHMETIC */
3318
3319 if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
3320 || width > HOST_BITS_PER_INT || width == 0)
3321 {
3322 /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
3323 there are some cases worth simplifying. */
3324
3325 switch (code)
3326 {
3327 case PLUS:
3328 /* In IEEE floating point, x+0 is not the same as x. Similarly
3329 for the other optimizations below. */
3330 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3331 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3332 break;
3333
3334 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3335 return op0;
3336
3337 /* Strip off any surrounding CONSTs. They don't matter in any of
3338 the cases below. */
3339 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST)
3340 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
3341 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST)
3342 op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
3343
3344 /* ((-a) + b) -> (b - a) and similarly for (a + (-b)) */
3345 if (GET_CODE (op0) == NEG)
3346 {
3347 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
3348 op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
3349 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op1, XEXP (op0, 0));
3350 }
3351 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
3352 {
3353 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
3354 op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3355 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3356 }
3357
3358 /* Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3359 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3360 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
3361 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3362 break;
3363
3364 /* (a - b) + b -> a, similarly a + (b - a) -> a */
3365 if (GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3366 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 1), op1) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3367 return XEXP (op0, 0);
3368
3369 if (GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS
3370 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 1), op0) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3371 return XEXP (op1, 0);
3372
3373 /* (c1 - a) + c2 becomes (c1 + c2) - a. */
3374 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS
3375 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == CONST_INT)
3376 {
3377 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode, op1,
3378 XEXP (op0, 0));
3379
3380 return tem ? gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, tem, XEXP (op0, 1)) : 0;
3381 }
3382
3383 /* Handle both-operands-constant cases. */
3384 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && CONSTANT_P (op1)
3385 && GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_DOUBLE
3386 && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_DOUBLE
3387 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3388 {
3389 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
3390 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
3391 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
3392 return plus_constant (op1, INTVAL (op0));
3393 else
3394 return gen_rtx (CONST, mode,
3395 gen_rtx (PLUS, mode,
3396 GET_CODE (op0) == CONST
3397 ? XEXP (op0, 0) : op0,
3398 GET_CODE (op1) == CONST
3399 ? XEXP (op1, 0) : op1));
3400 }
3401 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3402 && GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
3403 && (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
3404 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))))
3405 /* constant + (variable + constant)
3406 can result if an index register is made constant.
3407 We simplify this by adding the constants.
3408 If we did not, it would become an invalid address. */
3409 return plus_constant (op0, INTVAL (op1));
3410 break;
3411
3412 case COMPARE:
3413#ifdef HAVE_cc0
3414 /* Convert (compare FOO (const_int 0)) to FOO unless we aren't
3415 using cc0, in which case we want to leave it as a COMPARE
3416 so we can distinguish it from a register-register-copy.
3417
3418 In IEEE floating point, x-0 is not the same as x. */
3419
3420 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3421 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3422 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3423 return op0;
3424#else
3425 /* Do nothing here. */
3426#endif
3427 break;
3428
3429 case MINUS:
21648b45
RK
3430 /* None of these optimizations can be done for IEEE
3431 floating point. */
3432 if (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT == IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3433 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3434 break;
3435
3436 /* We can't assume x-x is 0 even with non-IEEE floating point. */
7afe21cc
RK
3437 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
3438 && ! side_effects_p (op0)
7afe21cc
RK
3439 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_FLOAT)
3440 return const0_rtx;
3441
3442 /* Change subtraction from zero into negation. */
3443 if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3444 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op1);
3445
7afe21cc
RK
3446 /* Subtracting 0 has no effect. */
3447 if (op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode))
3448 return op0;
3449
3450 /* Strip off any surrounding CONSTs. They don't matter in any of
3451 the cases below. */
3452 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST)
3453 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
3454 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST)
3455 op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
3456
3457 /* (a - (-b)) -> (a + b). */
3458 if (GET_CODE (op1) == NEG)
3459 {
3460 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode,
3461 op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3462 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, XEXP (op1, 0));
3463 }
3464
3465 /* Don't use the associative law for floating point.
3466 The inaccuracy makes it nonassociative,
3467 and subtle programs can break if operations are associated. */
3468 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
3469 break;
3470
3471 /* (a + b) - a -> b, and (b - (a + b)) -> -a */
3472 if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
3473 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1)
3474 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3475 return XEXP (op0, 1);
3476 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
3477 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 1), op1)
3478 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3479 return XEXP (op0, 0);
3480
3481 if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
3482 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)
3483 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3484 {
3485 rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 1),
3486 mode);
3487
3488 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 1));
3489 }
3490 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
3491 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 1), op0)
3492 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3493 {
3494 rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 0),
3495 mode);
3496
3497 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, XEXP (op1, 0));
3498 }
3499
3500 /* a - (a - b) -> b */
3501 if (GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS && rtx_equal_p (op0, XEXP (op1, 0))
3502 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3503 return XEXP (op1, 1);
3504
3505 /* (a +/- b) - (a +/- c) can be simplified. Do variants of
3506 this involving commutativity. The most common case is
3507 (a + C1) - (a + C2), but it's not hard to do all the cases. */
3508 if ((GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS)
3509 && (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS || GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS))
3510 {
3511 rtx lhs0 = XEXP (op0, 0), lhs1 = XEXP (op0, 1);
3512 rtx rhs0 = XEXP (op1, 0), rhs1 = XEXP (op1, 1);
3513 int lhs_neg = GET_CODE (op0) == MINUS;
3514 int rhs_neg = GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS;
3515 rtx lhs = 0, rhs = 0;
3516
3517 /* Set LHS and RHS to the two different terms. */
3518 if (rtx_equal_p (lhs0, rhs0) && ! side_effects_p (lhs0))
3519 lhs = lhs1, rhs = rhs1;
3520 else if (! rhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs0, rhs1)
3521 && ! side_effects_p (lhs0))
3522 lhs = lhs1, rhs = rhs0;
3523 else if (! lhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs1, rhs0)
3524 && ! side_effects_p (lhs1))
3525 lhs = lhs0, rhs = rhs1;
3526 else if (! lhs_neg && ! rhs_neg && rtx_equal_p (lhs1, rhs1)
3527 && ! side_effects_p (lhs1))
3528 lhs = lhs0, rhs = rhs0;
3529
3530 /* The RHS is the operand of a MINUS, so its negation
3531 status should be complemented. */
3532 rhs_neg = ! rhs_neg;
3533
3534 /* If we found two values equal, form the sum or difference
3535 of the remaining two terms. */
3536 if (lhs)
3537 {
3538 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (lhs_neg == rhs_neg
3539 ? PLUS : MINUS,
3540 mode,
3541 lhs_neg ? rhs : lhs,
3542 lhs_neg ? lhs : rhs);
3543 if (tem == 0)
3544 tem = gen_rtx (lhs_neg == rhs_neg
3545 ? PLUS : MINUS,
3546 mode, lhs_neg ? rhs : lhs,
3547 lhs_neg ? lhs : rhs);
3548
3549 /* If both sides negated, negate result. */
3550 if (lhs_neg && rhs_neg)
3551 {
3552 rtx tem1
3553 = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, tem, mode);
3554 if (tem1 == 0)
3555 tem1 = gen_rtx (NEG, mode, tem);
3556 tem = tem1;
3557 }
3558
3559 return tem;
3560 }
3561
3562 return 0;
3563 }
3564
3565 /* c1 - (a + c2) becomes (c1 - c2) - a. */
3566 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
3567 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3568 {
3569 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0,
3570 XEXP (op1, 1));
3571
3572 return tem ? gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, tem, XEXP (op1, 0)) : 0;
3573 }
3574
3575 /* c1 - (c2 - a) becomes (c1 - c2) + a. */
3576 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == MINUS
3577 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 0)) == CONST_INT)
3578 {
3579 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode, op0,
3580 XEXP (op1, 0));
3581
3582 return (tem && GET_CODE (tem) == CONST_INT
3583 ? plus_constant (XEXP (op1, 1), INTVAL (tem))
3584 : 0);
3585 }
3586
3587 /* Don't let a relocatable value get a negative coeff. */
3588 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
3589 return plus_constant (op0, - INTVAL (op1));
3590 break;
3591
3592 case MULT:
3593 if (op1 == constm1_rtx)
3594 {
3595 rtx tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op0, mode);
3596
3597 return tem ? tem : gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3598 }
3599
3600 /* In IEEE floating point, x*0 is not always 0. */
3601 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3602 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
3603 && op1 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3604 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3605 return op1;
3606
3607 /* In IEEE floating point, x*1 is not equivalent to x for nans.
3608 However, ANSI says we can drop signals,
3609 so we can do this anyway. */
3610 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3611 return op0;
3612
3613 /* Convert multiply by constant power of two into shift. */
3614 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3615 && (val = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) >= 0)
3616 return gen_rtx (ASHIFT, mode, op0,
3617 gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val));
3618
3619 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3620 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT)
3621 {
3622 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3623 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
3624
3625 /* x*2 is x+x and x*(-1) is -x */
3626 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst2)
3627 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
3628 return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, copy_rtx (op0));
3629
3630 else if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconstm1)
3631 && GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
3632 return gen_rtx (NEG, mode, op0);
3633 }
3634 break;
3635
3636 case IOR:
3637 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3638 return op0;
3639 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3640 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3641 return op1;
3642 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3643 return op0;
3644 /* A | (~A) -> -1 */
3645 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3646 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
3647 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3648 return constm1_rtx;
3649 break;
3650
3651 case XOR:
3652 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3653 return op0;
3654 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3655 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3656 return gen_rtx (NOT, mode, op0);
3657 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3658 return const0_rtx;
3659 break;
3660
3661 case AND:
3662 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3663 return const0_rtx;
3664 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3665 && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
3666 return op0;
3667 if (op0 == op1 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3668 return op0;
3669 /* A & (~A) -> 0 */
3670 if (((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op0, 0), op1))
3671 || (GET_CODE (op1) == NOT && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (op1, 0), op0)))
3672 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3673 return const0_rtx;
3674 break;
3675
3676 case UDIV:
3677 /* Convert divide by power of two into shift (divide by 1 handled
3678 below). */
3679 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3680 && (arg1 = exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1))) > 0)
3681 return gen_rtx (LSHIFTRT, mode, op0,
3682 gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, arg1));
3683
3684 /* ... fall through ... */
3685
3686 case DIV:
3687 if (op1 == CONST1_RTX (mode))
3688 return op0;
3689 else if (op0 == CONST0_RTX (mode)
3690 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3691 return op0;
3692#if 0 /* Turned off till an expert says this is a safe thing to do. */
3693#if ! defined (REAL_IS_NOT_DOUBLE) || defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3694 /* Change division by a constant into multiplication. */
3695 else if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3696 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op1)) == MODE_FLOAT
3697 && op1 != CONST0_RTX (mode))
3698 {
3699 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d;
3700 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d, op1);
3701 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d, dconst0))
3702 abort();
3703#if defined (REAL_ARITHMETIC)
3704 REAL_ARITHMETIC (d, RDIV_EXPR, dconst1, d);
3705 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3706 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (d, mode));
3707#else
3708 return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
3709 CONST_DOUBLE_FROM_REAL_VALUE (1./d, mode));
3710 }
3711#endif
3712#endif
3713#endif
3714 break;
3715
3716 case UMOD:
3717 /* Handle modulus by power of two (mod with 1 handled below). */
3718 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3719 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (op1)) > 0)
3720 return gen_rtx (AND, mode, op0,
3721 gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, INTVAL (op1) - 1));
3722
3723 /* ... fall through ... */
3724
3725 case MOD:
3726 if ((op0 == const0_rtx || op1 == const1_rtx)
3727 && ! side_effects_p (op0) && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3728 return const0_rtx;
3729 break;
3730
3731 case ROTATERT:
3732 case ROTATE:
3733 /* Rotating ~0 always results in ~0. */
3734 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3735 && INTVAL (op0) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
3736 && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3737 return op0;
3738
3739 /* ... fall through ... */
3740
3741 case LSHIFT:
3742 case ASHIFT:
3743 case ASHIFTRT:
3744 case LSHIFTRT:
3745 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3746 return op0;
3747 if (op0 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op1))
3748 return op0;
3749 break;
3750
3751 case SMIN:
3752 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3753 && INTVAL (op1) == 1 << (width -1)
3754 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3755 return op1;
3756 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3757 return op0;
3758 break;
3759
3760 case SMAX:
3761 if (width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
3762 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> 1
3763 && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3764 return op1;
3765 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3766 return op0;
3767 break;
3768
3769 case UMIN:
3770 if (op1 == const0_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3771 return op1;
3772 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3773 return op0;
3774 break;
3775
3776 case UMAX:
3777 if (op1 == constm1_rtx && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3778 return op1;
3779 else if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1) && ! side_effects_p (op0))
3780 return op0;
3781 break;
3782
3783 default:
3784 abort ();
3785 }
3786
3787 return 0;
3788 }
3789
3790 /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
3791 zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S. */
3792
3793 arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
3794 arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
3795
3796 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
3797 {
3798 arg0 &= (1 << width) - 1;
3799 arg1 &= (1 << width) - 1;
3800
3801 arg0s = arg0;
3802 if (arg0s & (1 << (width - 1)))
3803 arg0s |= ((-1) << width);
3804
3805 arg1s = arg1;
3806 if (arg1s & (1 << (width - 1)))
3807 arg1s |= ((-1) << width);
3808 }
3809 else
3810 {
3811 arg0s = arg0;
3812 arg1s = arg1;
3813 }
3814
3815 /* Compute the value of the arithmetic. */
3816
3817 switch (code)
3818 {
3819 case PLUS:
538b78e7 3820 val = arg0s + arg1s;
7afe21cc
RK
3821 break;
3822
3823 case MINUS:
538b78e7 3824 val = arg0s - arg1s;
7afe21cc
RK
3825 break;
3826
3827 case MULT:
3828 val = arg0s * arg1s;
3829 break;
3830
3831 case DIV:
3832 if (arg1s == 0)
3833 return 0;
3834 val = arg0s / arg1s;
3835 break;
3836
3837 case MOD:
3838 if (arg1s == 0)
3839 return 0;
3840 val = arg0s % arg1s;
3841 break;
3842
3843 case UDIV:
3844 if (arg1 == 0)
3845 return 0;
3846 val = (unsigned) arg0 / arg1;
3847 break;
3848
3849 case UMOD:
3850 if (arg1 == 0)
3851 return 0;
3852 val = (unsigned) arg0 % arg1;
3853 break;
3854
3855 case AND:
3856 val = arg0 & arg1;
3857 break;
3858
3859 case IOR:
3860 val = arg0 | arg1;
3861 break;
3862
3863 case XOR:
3864 val = arg0 ^ arg1;
3865 break;
3866
3867 case LSHIFTRT:
3868 /* If shift count is undefined, don't fold it; let the machine do
3869 what it wants. But truncate it if the machine will do that. */
3870 if (arg1 < 0)
3871 return 0;
3872
3873#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3874 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3875#endif
3876
3877 if (arg1 >= width)
3878 return 0;
3879
3880 val = ((unsigned) arg0) >> arg1;
3881 break;
3882
3883 case ASHIFT:
3884 case LSHIFT:
3885 if (arg1 < 0)
3886 return 0;
3887
3888#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3889 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3890#endif
3891
3892 if (arg1 >= width)
3893 return 0;
3894
3895 val = ((unsigned) arg0) << arg1;
3896 break;
3897
3898 case ASHIFTRT:
3899 if (arg1 < 0)
3900 return 0;
3901
3902#ifdef SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
3903 arg1 &= (BITS_PER_WORD - 1);
3904#endif
3905
3906 if (arg1 >= width)
3907 return 0;
3908
3909 val = arg0s >> arg1;
3910 break;
3911
3912 case ROTATERT:
3913 if (arg1 < 0)
3914 return 0;
3915
3916 arg1 %= width;
3917 val = ((((unsigned) arg0) << (width - arg1))
3918 | (((unsigned) arg0) >> arg1));
3919 break;
3920
3921 case ROTATE:
3922 if (arg1 < 0)
3923 return 0;
3924
3925 arg1 %= width;
3926 val = ((((unsigned) arg0) << arg1)
3927 | (((unsigned) arg0) >> (width - arg1)));
3928 break;
3929
3930 case COMPARE:
3931 /* Do nothing here. */
3932 return 0;
3933
830a38ee
RS
3934 case SMIN:
3935 val = arg0s <= arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
3936 break;
3937
3938 case UMIN:
3939 val = (unsigned int)arg0 <= (unsigned int)arg1 ? arg0 : arg1;
3940 break;
3941
3942 case SMAX:
3943 val = arg0s > arg1s ? arg0s : arg1s;
3944 break;
3945
3946 case UMAX:
3947 val = (unsigned int)arg0 > (unsigned int)arg1 ? arg0 : arg1;
3948 break;
3949
7afe21cc
RK
3950 default:
3951 abort ();
3952 }
3953
3954 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
3955 bit are all one. So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
3956 reasonable unsigned value for this mode. */
3957 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3958 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
3959 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
3960
3961 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
3962}
3963\f
3964/* Like simplify_binary_operation except used for relational operators.
3965 MODE is the mode of the operands, not that of the result. */
3966
3967rtx
3968simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, op0, op1)
3969 enum rtx_code code;
3970 enum machine_mode mode;
3971 rtx op0, op1;
3972{
3973 register int arg0, arg1, arg0s, arg1s;
3974 int val;
3975 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
3976
3977 /* If op0 is a compare, extract the comparison arguments from it. */
3978 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE && op1 == const0_rtx)
3979 op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
3980
3981 if (GET_CODE (op0) != CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT
3982 || width > HOST_BITS_PER_INT || width == 0)
3983 {
3984 /* Even if we can't compute a constant result,
3985 there are some cases worth simplifying. */
3986
3987 /* For non-IEEE floating-point, if the two operands are equal, we know
3988 the result. */
3989 if (rtx_equal_p (op0, op1)
3990 && (TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
3991 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) != MODE_FLOAT))
3992 return (code == EQ || code == GE || code == LE || code == LEU
3993 || code == GEU) ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
3994 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE
3995 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE
3996 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_FLOAT)
3997 {
3998 REAL_VALUE_TYPE d0, d1;
3999 int value;
4000 jmp_buf handler;
4001 int op0lt, op1lt, equal;
4002
4003 if (setjmp (handler))
4004 return 0;
4005
4006 set_float_handler (handler);
4007 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d0, op0);
4008 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (d1, op1);
4009 equal = REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (d0, d1);
4010 op0lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d0, d1);
4011 op1lt = REAL_VALUES_LESS (d1, d0);
4012 set_float_handler (0);
4013
4014 switch (code)
4015 {
4016 case EQ:
4017 return equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4018 case NE:
4019 return !equal ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4020 case LE:
4021 return equal || op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4022 case LT:
4023 return op0lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4024 case GE:
4025 return equal || op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4026 case GT:
4027 return op1lt ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
4028 }
4029 }
4030
4031 switch (code)
4032 {
4033 case EQ:
4034 {
4035#if 0
4036 /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
4037 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
4038 return const0_rtx;
4039#endif
8b3686ed
RK
4040 if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx
4041 /* On some machines, the ap reg can be 0 sometimes. */
4042 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx)
7afe21cc
RK
4043 return const0_rtx;
4044 break;
4045 }
4046
4047 case NE:
4048#if 0
4049 /* We can't make this assumption due to #pragma weak */
4050 if (CONSTANT_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx)
4051 return const_true_rtx;
4052#endif
8b3686ed
RK
4053 if (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (op0) && op1 == const0_rtx
4054 /* On some machines, the ap reg can be 0 sometimes. */
4055 && op0 != arg_pointer_rtx)
7afe21cc
RK
4056 return const_true_rtx;
4057 break;
4058
4059 case GEU:
4060 /* Unsigned values are never negative, but we must be sure we are
4061 actually comparing a value, not a CC operand. */
4062 if (op1 == const0_rtx
4063 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
4064 return const_true_rtx;
4065 break;
4066
4067 case LTU:
4068 if (op1 == const0_rtx
4069 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
4070 return const0_rtx;
4071 break;
4072
4073 case LEU:
4074 /* Unsigned values are never greater than the largest
4075 unsigned value. */
4076 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4077 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
4078 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
4079 return const_true_rtx;
4080 break;
4081
4082 case GTU:
4083 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4084 && INTVAL (op1) == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
4085 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT)
4086 return const0_rtx;
4087 break;
4088 }
4089
4090 return 0;
4091 }
4092
4093 /* Get the integer argument values in two forms:
4094 zero-extended in ARG0, ARG1 and sign-extended in ARG0S, ARG1S. */
4095
4096 arg0 = INTVAL (op0);
4097 arg1 = INTVAL (op1);
4098
4099 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
4100 {
4101 arg0 &= (1 << width) - 1;
4102 arg1 &= (1 << width) - 1;
4103
4104 arg0s = arg0;
4105 if (arg0s & (1 << (width - 1)))
4106 arg0s |= ((-1) << width);
4107
4108 arg1s = arg1;
4109 if (arg1s & (1 << (width - 1)))
4110 arg1s |= ((-1) << width);
4111 }
4112 else
4113 {
4114 arg0s = arg0;
4115 arg1s = arg1;
4116 }
4117
4118 /* Compute the value of the arithmetic. */
4119
4120 switch (code)
4121 {
4122 case NE:
4123 val = arg0 != arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4124 break;
4125
4126 case EQ:
4127 val = arg0 == arg1 ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4128 break;
4129
4130 case LE:
4131 val = arg0s <= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4132 break;
4133
4134 case LT:
4135 val = arg0s < arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4136 break;
4137
4138 case GE:
4139 val = arg0s >= arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4140 break;
4141
4142 case GT:
4143 val = arg0s > arg1s ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4144 break;
4145
4146 case LEU:
4147 val = ((unsigned) arg0) <= ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4148 break;
4149
4150 case LTU:
4151 val = ((unsigned) arg0) < ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4152 break;
4153
4154 case GEU:
4155 val = ((unsigned) arg0) >= ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4156 break;
4157
4158 case GTU:
4159 val = ((unsigned) arg0) > ((unsigned) arg1) ? STORE_FLAG_VALUE : 0;
4160 break;
4161
4162 default:
4163 abort ();
4164 }
4165
4166 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode, unless they and our sign
4167 bit are all one. So we get either a reasonable negative value or a
4168 reasonable unsigned value for this mode. */
4169 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
4170 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
4171 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
4172
4173 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
4174}
4175\f
4176/* Simplify CODE, an operation with result mode MODE and three operands,
4177 OP0, OP1, and OP2. OP0_MODE was the mode of OP0 before it became
4178 a constant. Return 0 if no simplifications is possible. */
4179
4180rtx
4181simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, op0, op1, op2)
4182 enum rtx_code code;
4183 enum machine_mode mode, op0_mode;
4184 rtx op0, op1, op2;
4185{
4186 int width = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
4187
4188 /* VOIDmode means "infinite" precision. */
4189 if (width == 0)
4190 width = HOST_BITS_PER_INT;
4191
4192 switch (code)
4193 {
4194 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
4195 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
4196 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT
4197 && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
4198 && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
4199 && INTVAL (op1) + INTVAL (op2) <= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode)
4200 && width <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
4201 {
4202 /* Extracting a bit-field from a constant */
4203 int val = INTVAL (op0);
4204
4205#if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
4206 val >>= (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (op0_mode) - INTVAL (op2) - INTVAL (op1));
4207#else
4208 val >>= INTVAL (op2);
4209#endif
4210 if (HOST_BITS_PER_INT != INTVAL (op1))
4211 {
4212 /* First zero-extend. */
4213 val &= (1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1;
4214 /* If desired, propagate sign bit. */
4215 if (code == SIGN_EXTRACT && (val & (1 << (INTVAL (op1) - 1))))
fc3ffe83 4216 val |= ~ ((1 << INTVAL (op1)) - 1);
7afe21cc
RK
4217 }
4218
4219 /* Clear the bits that don't belong in our mode,
4220 unless they and our sign bit are all one.
4221 So we get either a reasonable negative value or a reasonable
4222 unsigned value for this mode. */
4223 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
4224 && ((val & ((-1) << (width - 1))) != ((-1) << (width - 1))))
4225 val &= (1 << width) - 1;
4226
4227 return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, val);
4228 }
4229 break;
4230
4231 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
4232 if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT)
4233 return op0 != const0_rtx ? op1 : op2;
4234 break;
4235
4236 default:
4237 abort ();
4238 }
4239
4240 return 0;
4241}
4242\f
4243/* If X is a nontrivial arithmetic operation on an argument
4244 for which a constant value can be determined, return
4245 the result of operating on that value, as a constant.
4246 Otherwise, return X, possibly with one or more operands
4247 modified by recursive calls to this function.
4248
4249 If X is a register whose contents are known, we do NOT
4250 return those contents. This is because an instruction that
4251 uses a register is usually faster than one that uses a constant.
4252
4253 INSN is the insn that we may be modifying. If it is 0, make a copy
4254 of X before modifying it. */
4255
4256static rtx
4257fold_rtx (x, insn)
4258 rtx x;
4259 rtx insn;
4260{
4261 register enum rtx_code code;
4262 register enum machine_mode mode;
4263 register char *fmt;
4264 register int i, val;
4265 rtx new = 0;
4266 int copied = 0;
4267 int must_swap = 0;
4268
4269 /* Folded equivalents of first two operands of X. */
4270 rtx folded_arg0;
4271 rtx folded_arg1;
4272
4273 /* Constant equivalents of first three operands of X;
4274 0 when no such equivalent is known. */
4275 rtx const_arg0;
4276 rtx const_arg1;
4277 rtx const_arg2;
4278
4279 /* The mode of the first operand of X. We need this for sign and zero
4280 extends. */
4281 enum machine_mode mode_arg0;
4282
4283 if (x == 0)
4284 return x;
4285
4286 mode = GET_MODE (x);
4287 code = GET_CODE (x);
4288 switch (code)
4289 {
4290 case CONST:
4291 case CONST_INT:
4292 case CONST_DOUBLE:
4293 case SYMBOL_REF:
4294 case LABEL_REF:
4295 case REG:
4296 /* No use simplifying an EXPR_LIST
4297 since they are used only for lists of args
4298 in a function call's REG_EQUAL note. */
4299 case EXPR_LIST:
4300 return x;
4301
4302#ifdef HAVE_cc0
4303 case CC0:
4304 return prev_insn_cc0;
4305#endif
4306
4307 case PC:
4308 /* If the next insn is a CODE_LABEL followed by a jump table,
4309 PC's value is a LABEL_REF pointing to that label. That
4310 lets us fold switch statements on the Vax. */
4311 if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
4312 {
4313 rtx next = next_nonnote_insn (insn);
4314
4315 if (next && GET_CODE (next) == CODE_LABEL
4316 && NEXT_INSN (next) != 0
4317 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (next)) == JUMP_INSN
4318 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_VEC
4319 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (next))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC))
4320 return gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, next);
4321 }
4322 break;
4323
4324 case SUBREG:
c610adec
RK
4325 /* See if we previously assigned a constant value to this SUBREG. */
4326 if ((new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_INT)) != 0
4327 || (new = lookup_as_function (x, CONST_DOUBLE)) != 0)
7afe21cc
RK
4328 return new;
4329
e5f6a288
RK
4330 /* If this is a paradoxical SUBREG, we can't do anything with
4331 it because we have no idea what value the extra bits would have. */
4332 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
4333 return x;
4334
7afe21cc
RK
4335 /* Fold SUBREG_REG. If it changed, see if we can simplify the SUBREG.
4336 We might be able to if the SUBREG is extracting a single word in an
4337 integral mode or extracting the low part. */
4338
4339 folded_arg0 = fold_rtx (SUBREG_REG (x), insn);
4340 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
4341 if (const_arg0)
4342 folded_arg0 = const_arg0;
4343
4344 if (folded_arg0 != SUBREG_REG (x))
4345 {
4346 new = 0;
4347
4348 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4349 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4350 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != VOIDmode)
4351 new = operand_subword (folded_arg0, SUBREG_WORD (x), 0,
4352 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)));
4353 if (new == 0 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
4354 new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, folded_arg0);
4355 if (new)
4356 return new;
4357 }
e5f6a288
RK
4358
4359 /* If this is a narrowing SUBREG and our operand is a REG, see if
4360 we can find an equivalence for REG that is a arithmetic operation
4361 in a wider mode where both operands are paradoxical SUBREGs
4362 from objects of our result mode. In that case, we couldn't report
4363 an equivalent value for that operation, since we don't know what the
4364 extra bits will be. But we can find an equivalence for this SUBREG
4365 by folding that operation is the narrow mode. This allows us to
4366 fold arithmetic in narrow modes when the machine only supports
4367 word-sized arithmetic. */
4368
4369 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4370 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (folded_arg0)))
4371 {
4372 struct table_elt *elt;
4373
4374 /* We can use HASH here since we know that canon_hash won't be
4375 called. */
4376 elt = lookup (folded_arg0,
4377 HASH (folded_arg0, GET_MODE (folded_arg0)),
4378 GET_MODE (folded_arg0));
4379
4380 if (elt)
4381 elt = elt->first_same_value;
4382
4383 for (; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
4384 {
4385 /* Just check for unary and binary operations. */
4386 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '1'
4387 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != SIGN_EXTEND
4388 && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != ZERO_EXTEND
4389 && GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4390 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0))) == mode)
4391 {
4392 rtx op0 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4393
4394 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
4395 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, 0);
4396
4397 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4398 if (op0)
4399 new = simplify_unary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4400 op0, mode);
4401 }
4402 else if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == '2'
4403 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (elt->exp)) == 'c')
4404 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)) == SUBREG
4405 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4406 == mode))
4407 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 0)))
4408 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)) == SUBREG
4409 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (elt->exp, 1)))
4410 == mode))
4411 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (elt->exp, 1))))
4412 {
4413 rtx op0 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 0));
4414 rtx op1 = gen_lowpart_common (mode, XEXP (elt->exp, 1));
4415
4416 if (op0 && GET_CODE (op0) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op0))
4417 op0 = fold_rtx (op0, 0);
4418
4419 if (op0)
4420 op0 = equiv_constant (op0);
4421
4422 if (op1 && GET_CODE (op1) != REG && ! CONSTANT_P (op1))
4423 op1 = fold_rtx (op1, 0);
4424
4425 if (op1)
4426 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
4427
4428 if (op0 && op1)
4429 new = simplify_binary_operation (GET_CODE (elt->exp), mode,
4430 op0, op1);
4431 }
4432
4433 if (new)
4434 return new;
4435 }
4436 }
4437
7afe21cc
RK
4438 return x;
4439
4440 case NOT:
4441 case NEG:
4442 /* If we have (NOT Y), see if Y is known to be (NOT Z).
4443 If so, (NOT Y) simplifies to Z. Similarly for NEG. */
4444 new = lookup_as_function (XEXP (x, 0), code);
4445 if (new)
4446 return fold_rtx (copy_rtx (XEXP (new, 0)), insn);
4447 break;
4448
4449 case MEM:
4450 /* If we are not actually processing an insn, don't try to find the
4451 best address. Not only don't we care, but we could modify the
4452 MEM in an invalid way since we have no insn to validate against. */
4453 if (insn != 0)
4454 find_best_addr (insn, &XEXP (x, 0));
4455
4456 {
4457 /* Even if we don't fold in the insn itself,
4458 we can safely do so here, in hopes of getting a constant. */
4459 rtx addr = fold_rtx (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
4460 rtx base = 0;
4461 int offset = 0;
4462
4463 if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG
4464 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (addr))
4465 && GET_MODE (addr) == qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]]
4466 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]] != 0)
4467 addr = qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (addr)]];
4468
4469 /* If address is constant, split it into a base and integer offset. */
4470 if (GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF || GET_CODE (addr) == LABEL_REF)
4471 base = addr;
4472 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == PLUS
4473 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)
4474 {
4475 base = XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 0);
4476 offset = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (addr, 0), 1));
4477 }
4478 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM
4479 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == SYMBOL_REF)
4480 base = XEXP (addr, 1);
4481
4482 /* If this is a constant pool reference, we can fold it into its
4483 constant to allow better value tracking. */
4484 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == SYMBOL_REF
4485 && CONSTANT_POOL_ADDRESS_P (base))
4486 {
4487 rtx constant = get_pool_constant (base);
4488 enum machine_mode const_mode = get_pool_mode (base);
4489 rtx new;
4490
4491 if (CONSTANT_P (constant) && GET_CODE (constant) != CONST_INT)
4492 constant_pool_entries_cost = COST (constant);
4493
4494 /* If we are loading the full constant, we have an equivalence. */
4495 if (offset == 0 && mode == const_mode)
4496 return constant;
4497
4498 /* If this actually isn't a constant (wierd!), we can't do
4499 anything. Otherwise, handle the two most common cases:
4500 extracting a word from a multi-word constant, and extracting
4501 the low-order bits. Other cases don't seem common enough to
4502 worry about. */
4503 if (! CONSTANT_P (constant))
4504 return x;
4505
4506 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
4507 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) == UNITS_PER_WORD
4508 && offset % UNITS_PER_WORD == 0
4509 && (new = operand_subword (constant,
4510 offset / UNITS_PER_WORD,
4511 0, const_mode)) != 0)
4512 return new;
4513
4514 if (((BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
4515 && offset == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (constant)) - 1)
4516 || (! BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && offset == 0))
4517 && (new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, constant)) != 0)
4518 return new;
4519 }
4520
4521 /* If this is a reference to a label at a known position in a jump
4522 table, we also know its value. */
4523 if (base && GET_CODE (base) == LABEL_REF)
4524 {
4525 rtx label = XEXP (base, 0);
4526 rtx table_insn = NEXT_INSN (label);
4527
4528 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4529 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_VEC)
4530 {
4531 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4532
4533 if (offset >= 0
4534 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4535 < XVECLEN (table, 0)))
4536 return XVECEXP (table, 0,
4537 offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table)));
4538 }
4539 if (table_insn && GET_CODE (table_insn) == JUMP_INSN
4540 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (table_insn)) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC)
4541 {
4542 rtx table = PATTERN (table_insn);
4543
4544 if (offset >= 0
4545 && (offset / GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table))
4546 < XVECLEN (table, 1)))
4547 {
4548 offset /= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (table));
4549 new = gen_rtx (MINUS, Pmode, XVECEXP (table, 1, offset),
4550 XEXP (table, 0));
4551
4552 if (GET_MODE (table) != Pmode)
4553 new = gen_rtx (TRUNCATE, GET_MODE (table), new);
4554
4555 return new;
4556 }
4557 }
4558 }
4559
4560 return x;
4561 }
4562 }
4563
4564 const_arg0 = 0;
4565 const_arg1 = 0;
4566 const_arg2 = 0;
4567 mode_arg0 = VOIDmode;
4568
4569 /* Try folding our operands.
4570 Then see which ones have constant values known. */
4571
4572 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
4573 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
4574 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
4575 {
4576 rtx arg = XEXP (x, i);
4577 rtx folded_arg = arg, const_arg = 0;
4578 enum machine_mode mode_arg = GET_MODE (arg);
4579 rtx cheap_arg, expensive_arg;
4580 rtx replacements[2];
4581 int j;
4582
4583 /* Most arguments are cheap, so handle them specially. */
4584 switch (GET_CODE (arg))
4585 {
4586 case REG:
4587 /* This is the same as calling equiv_constant; it is duplicated
4588 here for speed. */
4589 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (arg))
4590 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]] != 0
4591 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != REG
4592 && GET_CODE (qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]) != PLUS)
4593 const_arg
4594 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (arg),
4595 qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (arg)]]);
4596 break;
4597
4598 case CONST:
4599 case CONST_INT:
4600 case SYMBOL_REF:
4601 case LABEL_REF:
4602 case CONST_DOUBLE:
4603 const_arg = arg;
4604 break;
4605
4606#ifdef HAVE_cc0
4607 case CC0:
4608 folded_arg = prev_insn_cc0;
4609 mode_arg = prev_insn_cc0_mode;
4610 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
4611 break;
4612#endif
4613
4614 default:
4615 folded_arg = fold_rtx (arg, insn);
4616 const_arg = equiv_constant (folded_arg);
4617 }
4618
4619 /* For the first three operands, see if the operand
4620 is constant or equivalent to a constant. */
4621 switch (i)
4622 {
4623 case 0:
4624 folded_arg0 = folded_arg;
4625 const_arg0 = const_arg;
4626 mode_arg0 = mode_arg;
4627 break;
4628 case 1:
4629 folded_arg1 = folded_arg;
4630 const_arg1 = const_arg;
4631 break;
4632 case 2:
4633 const_arg2 = const_arg;
4634 break;
4635 }
4636
4637 /* Pick the least expensive of the folded argument and an
4638 equivalent constant argument. */
4639 if (const_arg == 0 || const_arg == folded_arg
4640 || COST (const_arg) > COST (folded_arg))
4641 cheap_arg = folded_arg, expensive_arg = const_arg;
4642 else
4643 cheap_arg = const_arg, expensive_arg = folded_arg;
4644
4645 /* Try to replace the operand with the cheapest of the two
4646 possibilities. If it doesn't work and this is either of the first
4647 two operands of a commutative operation, try swapping them.
4648 If THAT fails, try the more expensive, provided it is cheaper
4649 than what is already there. */
4650
4651 if (cheap_arg == XEXP (x, i))
4652 continue;
4653
4654 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
4655 {
4656 x = copy_rtx (x);
4657 copied = 1;
4658 }
4659
4660 replacements[0] = cheap_arg, replacements[1] = expensive_arg;
4661 for (j = 0;
4662 j < 2 && replacements[j]
4663 && COST (replacements[j]) < COST (XEXP (x, i));
4664 j++)
4665 {
4666 if (validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), replacements[j], 0))
4667 break;
4668
4669 if (code == NE || code == EQ || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
4670 {
4671 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, i), XEXP (x, 1 - i), 1);
4672 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1 - i), replacements[j], 1);
4673
4674 if (apply_change_group ())
4675 {
4676 /* Swap them back to be invalid so that this loop can
4677 continue and flag them to be swapped back later. */
4678 rtx tem;
4679
4680 tem = XEXP (x, 0); XEXP (x, 0) = XEXP (x, 1);
4681 XEXP (x, 1) = tem;
4682 must_swap = 1;
4683 break;
4684 }
4685 }
4686 }
4687 }
4688
4689 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
4690 /* Don't try to fold inside of a vector of expressions.
4691 Doing nothing is harmless. */
4692 ;
4693
4694 /* If a commutative operation, place a constant integer as the second
4695 operand unless the first operand is also a constant integer. Otherwise,
4696 place any constant second unless the first operand is also a constant. */
4697
4698 if (code == EQ || code == NE || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'c')
4699 {
4700 if (must_swap || (const_arg0
4701 && (const_arg1 == 0
4702 || (GET_CODE (const_arg0) == CONST_INT
4703 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) != CONST_INT))))
4704 {
4705 register rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0);
4706
4707 if (insn == 0 && ! copied)
4708 {
4709 x = copy_rtx (x);
4710 copied = 1;
4711 }
4712
4713 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1), 1);
4714 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (x, 1), tem, 1);
4715 if (apply_change_group ())
4716 {
4717 tem = const_arg0, const_arg0 = const_arg1, const_arg1 = tem;
4718 tem = folded_arg0, folded_arg0 = folded_arg1, folded_arg1 = tem;
4719 }
4720 }
4721 }
4722
4723 /* If X is an arithmetic operation, see if we can simplify it. */
4724
4725 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
4726 {
4727 case '1':
e4890d45
RS
4728 /* We can't simplify extension ops unless we know the original mode. */
4729 if ((code == ZERO_EXTEND || code == SIGN_EXTEND)
4730 && mode_arg0 == VOIDmode)
4731 break;
7afe21cc
RK
4732 new = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode,
4733 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
4734 mode_arg0);
4735 break;
4736
4737 case '<':
4738 /* See what items are actually being compared and set FOLDED_ARG[01]
4739 to those values and CODE to the actual comparison code. If any are
4740 constant, set CONST_ARG0 and CONST_ARG1 appropriately. We needn't
4741 do anything if both operands are already known to be constant. */
4742
4743 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
4744 {
4745 struct table_elt *p0, *p1;
c610adec
RK
4746 rtx true = const_true_rtx, false = const0_rtx;
4747
4748#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
4749 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode))
4750 {
4751 true = immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode);
4752 false = CONST0_RTX (mode);
4753 }
4754#endif
7afe21cc
RK
4755
4756 code = find_comparison_args (code, &folded_arg0, &folded_arg1);
4757 const_arg0 = equiv_constant (folded_arg0);
4758 const_arg1 = equiv_constant (folded_arg1);
4759
4760 /* Get a mode from the values actually being compared, or from the
4761 old value of MODE_ARG0 if both are constants. If the resulting
4762 mode is VOIDmode or a MODE_CC mode, we don't know what kinds
4763 of things are being compared, so we can't do anything with this
4764 comparison. */
4765
4766 if (GET_MODE (folded_arg0) != VOIDmode
4767 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (folded_arg0)) != MODE_CC)
4768 mode_arg0 = GET_MODE (folded_arg0);
4769
4770 else if (GET_MODE (folded_arg1) != VOIDmode
4771 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (folded_arg1)) != MODE_CC)
4772 mode_arg0 = GET_MODE (folded_arg1);
4773
4774 if (mode_arg0 == VOIDmode || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_CC)
4775 break;
4776
4777 /* If we do not now have two constants being compared, see if we
4778 can nevertheless deduce some things about the comparison. */
4779 if (const_arg0 == 0 || const_arg1 == 0)
4780 {
4781 /* Is FOLDED_ARG0 frame-pointer plus a constant? Or non-explicit
4782 constant? These aren't zero, but we don't know their sign. */
4783 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx
4784 && (NONZERO_BASE_PLUS_P (folded_arg0)
4785#if 0 /* Sad to say, on sysvr4, #pragma weak can make a symbol address
4786 come out as 0. */
4787 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == SYMBOL_REF
4788#endif
4789 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == LABEL_REF
4790 || GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == CONST))
4791 {
4792 if (code == EQ)
c610adec 4793 return false;
7afe21cc 4794 else if (code == NE)
c610adec 4795 return true;
7afe21cc
RK
4796 }
4797
4798 /* See if the two operands are the same. We don't do this
4799 for IEEE floating-point since we can't assume x == x
4800 since x might be a NaN. */
4801
4802 if ((TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT != IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
4803 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) != MODE_FLOAT)
4804 && (folded_arg0 == folded_arg1
4805 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4806 && GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
4807 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)]
4808 == reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]))
4809 || ((p0 = lookup (folded_arg0,
4810 (safe_hash (folded_arg0, mode_arg0)
4811 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
4812 && (p1 = lookup (folded_arg1,
4813 (safe_hash (folded_arg1, mode_arg0)
4814 % NBUCKETS), mode_arg0))
4815 && p0->first_same_value == p1->first_same_value)))
4816 return ((code == EQ || code == LE || code == GE
4817 || code == LEU || code == GEU)
c610adec 4818 ? true : false);
7afe21cc
RK
4819
4820 /* If FOLDED_ARG0 is a register, see if the comparison we are
4821 doing now is either the same as we did before or the reverse
4822 (we only check the reverse if not floating-point). */
4823 else if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG)
4824 {
4825 int qty = reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg0)];
4826
4827 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (folded_arg0))
4828 && (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty], code)
4829 || (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
4830 reverse_condition (code))
4831 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode_arg0) == MODE_INT))
4832 && (rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty], folded_arg1)
4833 || (const_arg1
4834 && rtx_equal_p (qty_comparison_const[qty],
4835 const_arg1))
4836 || (GET_CODE (folded_arg1) == REG
4837 && (reg_qty[REGNO (folded_arg1)]
4838 == qty_comparison_qty[qty]))))
4839 return (comparison_dominates_p (qty_comparison_code[qty],
4840 code)
c610adec 4841 ? true : false);
7afe21cc
RK
4842 }
4843 }
4844 }
4845
4846 /* If we are comparing against zero, see if the first operand is
4847 equivalent to an IOR with a constant. If so, we may be able to
4848 determine the result of this comparison. */
4849
4850 if (const_arg1 == const0_rtx)
4851 {
4852 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, IOR);
4853 rtx inner_const;
4854
4855 if (y != 0
4856 && (inner_const = equiv_constant (XEXP (y, 1))) != 0
4857 && GET_CODE (inner_const) == CONST_INT
4858 && INTVAL (inner_const) != 0)
4859 {
4860 int sign_bitnum = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode_arg0) - 1;
4861 int has_sign = (HOST_BITS_PER_INT >= sign_bitnum
4862 && (INTVAL (inner_const) & (1 << sign_bitnum)));
c610adec
RK
4863 rtx true = const_true_rtx, false = const0_rtx;
4864
4865#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
4866 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode))
4867 {
4868 true = immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode);
4869 false = CONST0_RTX (mode);
4870 }
4871#endif
7afe21cc
RK
4872
4873 switch (code)
4874 {
4875 case EQ:
c610adec 4876 return false;
7afe21cc 4877 case NE:
c610adec 4878 return true;
7afe21cc
RK
4879 case LT: case LE:
4880 if (has_sign)
c610adec 4881 return true;
7afe21cc
RK
4882 break;
4883 case GT: case GE:
4884 if (has_sign)
c610adec 4885 return false;
7afe21cc
RK
4886 break;
4887 }
4888 }
4889 }
4890
4891 new = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode_arg0,
4892 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
4893 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
c610adec
RK
4894#ifdef FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
4895 if (new != 0 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
4896 new = ((new == const0_rtx) ? CONST0_RTX (mode)
4897 : immed_real_const_1 (FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE, mode));
4898#endif
7afe21cc
RK
4899 break;
4900
4901 case '2':
4902 case 'c':
4903 switch (code)
4904 {
4905 case PLUS:
4906 /* If the second operand is a LABEL_REF, see if the first is a MINUS
4907 with that LABEL_REF as its second operand. If so, the result is
4908 the first operand of that MINUS. This handles switches with an
4909 ADDR_DIFF_VEC table. */
4910 if (const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == LABEL_REF)
4911 {
4912 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, MINUS);
4913
4914 if (y != 0 && GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 1)) == LABEL_REF
4915 && XEXP (XEXP (y, 1), 0) == XEXP (const_arg1, 0))
4916 return XEXP (y, 0);
4917 }
4918
4919 /* ... fall through ... */
4920
4921 case MINUS:
4922 case SMIN: case SMAX: case UMIN: case UMAX:
4923 case IOR: case AND: case XOR:
4924 case MULT: case DIV: case UDIV:
4925 case ASHIFT: case LSHIFTRT: case ASHIFTRT:
4926 /* If we have (<op> <reg> <const_int>) for an associative OP and REG
4927 is known to be of similar form, we may be able to replace the
4928 operation with a combined operation. This may eliminate the
4929 intermediate operation if every use is simplified in this way.
4930 Note that the similar optimization done by combine.c only works
4931 if the intermediate operation's result has only one reference. */
4932
4933 if (GET_CODE (folded_arg0) == REG
4934 && const_arg1 && GET_CODE (const_arg1) == CONST_INT)
4935 {
4936 int is_shift
4937 = (code == ASHIFT || code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT);
4938 rtx y = lookup_as_function (folded_arg0, code);
4939 rtx inner_const;
4940 enum rtx_code associate_code;
4941 rtx new_const;
4942
4943 if (y == 0
4944 || 0 == (inner_const
4945 = equiv_constant (fold_rtx (XEXP (y, 1), 0)))
4946 || GET_CODE (inner_const) != CONST_INT
4947 /* If we have compiled a statement like
4948 "if (x == (x & mask1))", and now are looking at
4949 "x & mask2", we will have a case where the first operand
4950 of Y is the same as our first operand. Unless we detect
4951 this case, an infinite loop will result. */
4952 || XEXP (y, 0) == folded_arg0)
4953 break;
4954
4955 /* Don't associate these operations if they are a PLUS with the
4956 same constant and it is a power of two. These might be doable
4957 with a pre- or post-increment. Similarly for two subtracts of
4958 identical powers of two with post decrement. */
4959
4960 if (code == PLUS && INTVAL (const_arg1) == INTVAL (inner_const)
4961 && (0
4962#if defined(HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_INCREMENT)
4963 || exact_log2 (INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
4964#endif
4965#if defined(HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT) || defined(HAVE_POST_DECREMENT)
4966 || exact_log2 (- INTVAL (const_arg1)) >= 0
4967#endif
4968 ))
4969 break;
4970
4971 /* Compute the code used to compose the constants. For example,
4972 A/C1/C2 is A/(C1 * C2), so if CODE == DIV, we want MULT. */
4973
4974 associate_code
4975 = (code == MULT || code == DIV || code == UDIV ? MULT
4976 : is_shift || code == PLUS || code == MINUS ? PLUS : code);
4977
4978 new_const = simplify_binary_operation (associate_code, mode,
4979 const_arg1, inner_const);
4980
4981 if (new_const == 0)
4982 break;
4983
4984 /* If we are associating shift operations, don't let this
4985 produce a shift of larger than the object. This could
4986 occur when we following a sign-extend by a right shift on
4987 a machine that does a sign-extend as a pair of shifts. */
4988
4989 if (is_shift && GET_CODE (new_const) == CONST_INT
4990 && INTVAL (new_const) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
4991 break;
4992
4993 y = copy_rtx (XEXP (y, 0));
4994
4995 /* If Y contains our first operand (the most common way this
4996 can happen is if Y is a MEM), we would do into an infinite
4997 loop if we tried to fold it. So don't in that case. */
4998
4999 if (! reg_mentioned_p (folded_arg0, y))
5000 y = fold_rtx (y, insn);
5001
5002 new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, y, new_const);
5003 if (new)
5004 return new;
5005
5006 return gen_rtx (code, mode, y, new_const);
5007 }
5008 }
5009
5010 new = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
5011 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5012 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1);
5013 break;
5014
5015 case 'o':
5016 /* (lo_sum (high X) X) is simply X. */
5017 if (code == LO_SUM && const_arg0 != 0
5018 && GET_CODE (const_arg0) == HIGH
5019 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (const_arg0, 0), const_arg1))
5020 return const_arg1;
5021 break;
5022
5023 case '3':
5024 case 'b':
5025 new = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, mode_arg0,
5026 const_arg0 ? const_arg0 : folded_arg0,
5027 const_arg1 ? const_arg1 : folded_arg1,
5028 const_arg2 ? const_arg2 : XEXP (x, 2));
5029 break;
5030 }
5031
5032 return new ? new : x;
5033}
5034\f
5035/* Return a constant value currently equivalent to X.
5036 Return 0 if we don't know one. */
5037
5038static rtx
5039equiv_constant (x)
5040 rtx x;
5041{
5042 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG
5043 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
5044 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]])
5045 x = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (x)]]);
5046
5047 if (x != 0 && CONSTANT_P (x))
5048 return x;
5049
fc3ffe83
RK
5050 /* If X is a MEM, try to fold it outside the context of any insn to see if
5051 it might be equivalent to a constant. That handles the case where it
5052 is a constant-pool reference. Then try to look it up in the hash table
5053 in case it is something whose value we have seen before. */
5054
5055 if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
5056 {
5057 struct table_elt *elt;
5058
5059 x = fold_rtx (x, 0);
5060 if (CONSTANT_P (x))
5061 return x;
5062
5063 elt = lookup (x, safe_hash (x, GET_MODE (x)) % NBUCKETS, GET_MODE (x));
5064 if (elt == 0)
5065 return 0;
5066
5067 for (elt = elt->first_same_value; elt; elt = elt->next_same_value)
5068 if (elt->is_const && CONSTANT_P (elt->exp))
5069 return elt->exp;
5070 }
5071
7afe21cc
RK
5072 return 0;
5073}
5074\f
5075/* Assuming that X is an rtx (e.g., MEM, REG or SUBREG) for a fixed-point
5076 number, return an rtx (MEM, SUBREG, or CONST_INT) that refers to the
5077 least-significant part of X.
5078 MODE specifies how big a part of X to return.
5079
5080 If the requested operation cannot be done, 0 is returned.
5081
5082 This is similar to gen_lowpart in emit-rtl.c. */
5083
5084rtx
5085gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, x)
5086 enum machine_mode mode;
5087 register rtx x;
5088{
5089 rtx result = gen_lowpart_common (mode, x);
5090
5091 if (result)
5092 return result;
5093 else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
5094 {
5095 /* This is the only other case we handle. */
5096 register int offset = 0;
5097 rtx new;
5098
5099#if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
5100 offset = (MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)), UNITS_PER_WORD)
5101 - MAX (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), UNITS_PER_WORD));
5102#endif
5103#if BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
5104 /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data
5105 is unchanged. */
5106 offset -= (MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
5107 - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))));
5108#endif
5109 new = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, plus_constant (XEXP (x, 0), offset));
5110 if (! memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (new, 0)))
5111 return 0;
5112 MEM_VOLATILE_P (new) = MEM_VOLATILE_P (x);
5113 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (new) = RTX_UNCHANGING_P (x);
5114 MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (new) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (x);
5115 return new;
5116 }
5117 else
5118 return 0;
5119}
5120\f
5121/* Given INSN, a jump insn, TAKEN indicates if we are following the "taken"
5122 branch. It will be zero if not.
5123
5124 In certain cases, this can cause us to add an equivalence. For example,
5125 if we are following the taken case of
5126 if (i == 2)
5127 we can add the fact that `i' and '2' are now equivalent.
5128
5129 In any case, we can record that this comparison was passed. If the same
5130 comparison is seen later, we will know its value. */
5131
5132static void
5133record_jump_equiv (insn, taken)
5134 rtx insn;
5135 int taken;
5136{
5137 int cond_known_true;
5138 rtx op0, op1;
5139 enum machine_mode mode;
5140 int reversed_nonequality = 0;
5141 enum rtx_code code;
5142
5143 /* Ensure this is the right kind of insn. */
5144 if (! condjump_p (insn) || simplejump_p (insn))
5145 return;
5146
5147 /* See if this jump condition is known true or false. */
5148 if (taken)
5149 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 2) == pc_rtx);
5150 else
5151 cond_known_true = (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 1) == pc_rtx);
5152
5153 /* Get the type of comparison being done and the operands being compared.
5154 If we had to reverse a non-equality condition, record that fact so we
5155 know that it isn't valid for floating-point. */
5156 code = GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0));
5157 op0 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 0), insn);
5158 op1 = fold_rtx (XEXP (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)), 0), 1), insn);
5159
5160 code = find_comparison_args (code, &op0, &op1);
5161 if (! cond_known_true)
5162 {
5163 reversed_nonequality = (code != EQ && code != NE);
5164 code = reverse_condition (code);
5165 }
5166
5167 /* The mode is the mode of the non-constant. */
5168 mode = GET_MODE (op0);
5169 if (mode == VOIDmode) mode = GET_MODE (op1);
5170
5171 record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality);
5172}
5173
5174/* We know that comparison CODE applied to OP0 and OP1 in MODE is true.
5175 REVERSED_NONEQUALITY is nonzero if CODE had to be swapped.
5176 Make any useful entries we can with that information. Called from
5177 above function and called recursively. */
5178
5179static void
5180record_jump_cond (code, mode, op0, op1, reversed_nonequality)
5181 enum rtx_code code;
5182 enum machine_mode mode;
5183 rtx op0, op1;
5184 int reversed_nonequality;
5185{
5186 int op0_hash_code, op1_hash_code;
5187 int op0_in_memory, op0_in_struct, op1_in_memory, op1_in_struct;
5188 struct table_elt *op0_elt, *op1_elt;
5189
5190 /* If OP0 and OP1 are known equal, and either is a paradoxical SUBREG,
5191 we know that they are also equal in the smaller mode (this is also
5192 true for all smaller modes whether or not there is a SUBREG, but
5193 is not worth testing for with no SUBREG. */
5194
5195 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5196 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))))
5197 {
5198 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5199 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5200
5201 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5202 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5203 reversed_nonequality);
5204 }
5205
5206 if (code == EQ && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5207 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1))))
5208 {
5209 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5210 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5211
5212 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5213 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5214 reversed_nonequality);
5215 }
5216
5217 /* Similarly, if this is an NE comparison, and either is a SUBREG
5218 making a smaller mode, we know the whole thing is also NE. */
5219
5220 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
5221 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
5222 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))))
5223 {
5224 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
5225 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op1);
5226
5227 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op0),
5228 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op1, 0),
5229 reversed_nonequality);
5230 }
5231
5232 if (code == NE && GET_CODE (op1) == SUBREG
5233 && subreg_lowpart_p (op1)
5234 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1))))
5235 {
5236 enum machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op1));
5237 rtx tem = gen_lowpart_if_possible (inner_mode, op0);
5238
5239 record_jump_cond (code, mode, SUBREG_REG (op1),
5240 tem ? tem : gen_rtx (SUBREG, inner_mode, op0, 0),
5241 reversed_nonequality);
5242 }
5243
5244 /* Hash both operands. */
5245
5246 do_not_record = 0;
5247 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5248 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5249 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5250 op0_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5251 op0_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5252
5253 if (do_not_record)
5254 return;
5255
5256 do_not_record = 0;
5257 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5258 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5259 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5260 op1_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5261 op1_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5262
5263 if (do_not_record)
5264 return;
5265
5266 /* Look up both operands. */
5267 op0_elt = lookup (op0, op0_hash_code, mode);
5268 op1_elt = lookup (op1, op1_hash_code, mode);
5269
5270 /* If we aren't setting two things equal all we can do is save this
5271 comparison. */
5272 if (code != EQ)
5273 {
5274 /* If we reversed a floating-point comparison, if OP0 is not a
5275 register, or if OP1 is neither a register or constant, we can't
5276 do anything. */
5277
5278 if (GET_CODE (op1) != REG)
5279 op1 = equiv_constant (op1);
5280
5281 if ((reversed_nonequality && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT)
5282 || GET_CODE (op0) != REG || op1 == 0)
5283 return;
5284
5285 /* Put OP0 in the hash table if it isn't already. This gives it a
5286 new quantity number. */
5287 if (op0_elt == 0)
5288 {
5289 if (insert_regs (op0, 0, 0))
5290 {
5291 rehash_using_reg (op0);
5292 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5293 }
5294
5295 op0_elt = insert (op0, 0, op0_hash_code, mode);
5296 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5297 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5298 }
5299
5300 qty_comparison_code[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = code;
5301 if (GET_CODE (op1) == REG)
5302 {
5303 /* Put OP1 in the hash table so it gets a new quantity number. */
5304 if (op1_elt == 0)
5305 {
5306 if (insert_regs (op1, 0, 0))
5307 {
5308 rehash_using_reg (op1);
5309 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5310 }
5311
5312 op1_elt = insert (op1, 0, op1_hash_code, mode);
5313 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5314 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5315 }
5316
5317 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = reg_qty[REGNO (op1)];
5318 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = 0;
5319 }
5320 else
5321 {
5322 qty_comparison_qty[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = -1;
5323 qty_comparison_const[reg_qty[REGNO (op0)]] = op1;
5324 }
5325
5326 return;
5327 }
5328
5329 /* If both are equivalent, merge the two classes. Save this class for
5330 `cse_set_around_loop'. */
5331 if (op0_elt && op1_elt)
5332 {
5333 merge_equiv_classes (op0_elt, op1_elt);
5334 last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
5335 }
5336
5337 /* For whichever side doesn't have an equivalence, make one. */
5338 if (op0_elt == 0)
5339 {
5340 if (insert_regs (op0, op1_elt, 0))
5341 {
5342 rehash_using_reg (op0);
5343 op0_hash_code = HASH (op0, mode);
5344 }
5345
5346 op0_elt = insert (op0, op1_elt, op0_hash_code, mode);
5347 op0_elt->in_memory = op0_in_memory;
5348 op0_elt->in_struct = op0_in_struct;
5349 last_jump_equiv_class = op0_elt;
5350 }
5351
5352 if (op1_elt == 0)
5353 {
5354 if (insert_regs (op1, op0_elt, 0))
5355 {
5356 rehash_using_reg (op1);
5357 op1_hash_code = HASH (op1, mode);
5358 }
5359
5360 op1_elt = insert (op1, op0_elt, op1_hash_code, mode);
5361 op1_elt->in_memory = op1_in_memory;
5362 op1_elt->in_struct = op1_in_struct;
5363 last_jump_equiv_class = op1_elt;
5364 }
5365}
5366\f
5367/* CSE processing for one instruction.
5368 First simplify sources and addresses of all assignments
5369 in the instruction, using previously-computed equivalents values.
5370 Then install the new sources and destinations in the table
5371 of available values.
5372
5373 If IN_LIBCALL_BLOCK is nonzero, don't record any equivalence made in
5374 the insn. */
5375
5376/* Data on one SET contained in the instruction. */
5377
5378struct set
5379{
5380 /* The SET rtx itself. */
5381 rtx rtl;
5382 /* The SET_SRC of the rtx (the original value, if it is changing). */
5383 rtx src;
5384 /* The hash-table element for the SET_SRC of the SET. */
5385 struct table_elt *src_elt;
5386 /* Hash code for the SET_SRC. */
5387 int src_hash_code;
5388 /* Hash code for the SET_DEST. */
5389 int dest_hash_code;
5390 /* The SET_DEST, with SUBREG, etc., stripped. */
5391 rtx inner_dest;
5392 /* Place where the pointer to the INNER_DEST was found. */
5393 rtx *inner_dest_loc;
5394 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in memory. */
5395 char src_in_memory;
5396 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC is in a structure. */
5397 char src_in_struct;
5398 /* Nonzero if the SET_SRC contains something
5399 whose value cannot be predicted and understood. */
5400 char src_volatile;
5401 /* Original machine mode, in case it becomes a CONST_INT. */
5402 enum machine_mode mode;
5403 /* A constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5404 rtx src_const;
5405 /* Hash code of constant equivalent for SET_SRC. */
5406 int src_const_hash_code;
5407 /* Table entry for constant equivalent for SET_SRC, if any. */
5408 struct table_elt *src_const_elt;
5409};
5410
5411static void
5412cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block)
5413 rtx insn;
5414 int in_libcall_block;
5415{
5416 register rtx x = PATTERN (insn);
5417 rtx tem;
5418 register int i;
5419 register int n_sets = 0;
5420
5421 /* Records what this insn does to set CC0. */
5422 rtx this_insn_cc0 = 0;
5423 enum machine_mode this_insn_cc0_mode;
5424 struct write_data writes_memory;
5425 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
5426
5427 rtx src_eqv = 0;
5428 struct table_elt *src_eqv_elt = 0;
5429 int src_eqv_volatile;
5430 int src_eqv_in_memory;
5431 int src_eqv_in_struct;
5432 int src_eqv_hash_code;
5433
5434 struct set *sets;
5435
5436 this_insn = insn;
5437 writes_memory = init;
5438
5439 /* Find all the SETs and CLOBBERs in this instruction.
5440 Record all the SETs in the array `set' and count them.
5441 Also determine whether there is a CLOBBER that invalidates
5442 all memory references, or all references at varying addresses. */
5443
5444 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
5445 {
5446 sets = (struct set *) alloca (sizeof (struct set));
5447 sets[0].rtl = x;
5448
5449 /* Ignore SETs that are unconditional jumps.
5450 They never need cse processing, so this does not hurt.
5451 The reason is not efficiency but rather
5452 so that we can test at the end for instructions
5453 that have been simplified to unconditional jumps
5454 and not be misled by unchanged instructions
5455 that were unconditional jumps to begin with. */
5456 if (SET_DEST (x) == pc_rtx
5457 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == LABEL_REF)
5458 ;
5459
5460 /* Don't count call-insns, (set (reg 0) (call ...)), as a set.
5461 The hard function value register is used only once, to copy to
5462 someplace else, so it isn't worth cse'ing (and on 80386 is unsafe)!
5463 Ensure we invalidate the destination register. On the 80386 no
5464 other code would invalidate it since it is a fixed_reg. */
5465
5466 else if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == CALL)
5467 {
5468 canon_reg (SET_SRC (x), insn);
77fa0940 5469 apply_change_group ();
7afe21cc
RK
5470 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (x), insn);
5471 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
5472 }
5473 else
5474 n_sets = 1;
5475 }
5476 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
5477 {
5478 register int lim = XVECLEN (x, 0);
5479
5480 sets = (struct set *) alloca (lim * sizeof (struct set));
5481
5482 /* Find all regs explicitly clobbered in this insn,
5483 and ensure they are not replaced with any other regs
5484 elsewhere in this insn.
5485 When a reg that is clobbered is also used for input,
5486 we should presume that that is for a reason,
5487 and we should not substitute some other register
5488 which is not supposed to be clobbered.
5489 Therefore, this loop cannot be merged into the one below
830a38ee 5490 because a CALL may precede a CLOBBER and refer to the
7afe21cc
RK
5491 value clobbered. We must not let a canonicalization do
5492 anything in that case. */
5493 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
5494 {
5495 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
830a38ee
RS
5496 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER
5497 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
5498 || GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == SUBREG))
7afe21cc
RK
5499 invalidate (XEXP (y, 0));
5500 }
5501
5502 for (i = 0; i < lim; i++)
5503 {
5504 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
5505 if (GET_CODE (y) == SET)
5506 {
5507 /* As above, we ignore unconditional jumps and call-insns. */
5508 if (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == CALL)
5509 {
5510 canon_reg (SET_SRC (y), insn);
77fa0940 5511 apply_change_group ();
7afe21cc
RK
5512 fold_rtx (SET_SRC (y), insn);
5513 invalidate (SET_DEST (y));
5514 }
5515 else if (SET_DEST (y) == pc_rtx
5516 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (y)) == LABEL_REF)
5517 ;
5518 else
5519 sets[n_sets++].rtl = y;
5520 }
5521 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
5522 {
5523 /* If we clobber memory, take note of that,
5524 and canon the address.
5525 This does nothing when a register is clobbered
5526 because we have already invalidated the reg. */
5527 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == MEM)
5528 {
5529 canon_reg (XEXP (y, 0), 0);
5530 note_mem_written (XEXP (y, 0), &writes_memory);
5531 }
5532 }
5533 else if (GET_CODE (y) == USE
5534 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (y, 0)) == REG
5535 && REGNO (XEXP (y, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
5536 canon_reg (y, 0);
5537 else if (GET_CODE (y) == CALL)
5538 {
5539 canon_reg (y, insn);
77fa0940 5540 apply_change_group ();
7afe21cc
RK
5541 fold_rtx (y, insn);
5542 }
5543 }
5544 }
5545 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
5546 {
5547 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MEM)
5548 {
5549 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
5550 note_mem_written (XEXP (x, 0), &writes_memory);
5551 }
5552 }
5553
5554 /* Canonicalize a USE of a pseudo register or memory location. */
5555 else if (GET_CODE (x) == USE
5556 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == REG
5557 && REGNO (XEXP (x, 0)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
5558 canon_reg (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
5559 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CALL)
5560 {
5561 canon_reg (x, insn);
77fa0940 5562 apply_change_group ();
7afe21cc
RK
5563 fold_rtx (x, insn);
5564 }
5565
5566 if (n_sets == 1 && REG_NOTES (insn) != 0)
5567 {
5568 /* Store the equivalent value in SRC_EQV, if different. */
5569 rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, 0);
5570
5571 if (tem && ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (tem, 0), SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
5572 src_eqv = canon_reg (XEXP (tem, 0), 0);
5573 }
5574
5575 /* Canonicalize sources and addresses of destinations.
5576 We do this in a separate pass to avoid problems when a MATCH_DUP is
5577 present in the insn pattern. In that case, we want to ensure that
5578 we don't break the duplicate nature of the pattern. So we will replace
5579 both operands at the same time. Otherwise, we would fail to find an
5580 equivalent substitution in the loop calling validate_change below.
7afe21cc
RK
5581
5582 We used to suppress canonicalization of DEST if it appears in SRC,
77fa0940 5583 but we don't do this any more. */
7afe21cc
RK
5584
5585 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5586 {
5587 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5588 rtx src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5589 rtx new = canon_reg (src, insn);
5590
77fa0940
RK
5591 if ((GET_CODE (new) == REG && GET_CODE (src) == REG
5592 && ((REGNO (new) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
5593 != (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
5594 || insn_n_dups[recog_memoized (insn)] > 0)
5595 validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), new, 1);
7afe21cc
RK
5596 else
5597 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = new;
5598
5599 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5600 {
5601 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 1),
77fa0940 5602 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 1), insn), 1);
7afe21cc 5603 validate_change (insn, &XEXP (dest, 2),
77fa0940 5604 canon_reg (XEXP (dest, 2), insn), 1);
7afe21cc
RK
5605 }
5606
5607 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
5608 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5609 || GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5610 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
5611
5612 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
5613 canon_reg (dest, insn);
5614 }
5615
77fa0940
RK
5616 /* Now that we have done all the replacements, we can apply the change
5617 group and see if they all work. Note that this will cause some
5618 canonicalizations that would have worked individually not to be applied
5619 because some other canonicalization didn't work, but this should not
5620 occur often. */
5621
5622 apply_change_group ();
5623
7afe21cc
RK
5624 /* Set sets[i].src_elt to the class each source belongs to.
5625 Detect assignments from or to volatile things
5626 and set set[i] to zero so they will be ignored
5627 in the rest of this function.
5628
5629 Nothing in this loop changes the hash table or the register chains. */
5630
5631 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
5632 {
5633 register rtx src, dest;
5634 register rtx src_folded;
5635 register struct table_elt *elt = 0, *p;
5636 enum machine_mode mode;
5637 rtx src_eqv_here;
5638 rtx src_const = 0;
5639 rtx src_related = 0;
5640 struct table_elt *src_const_elt = 0;
5641 int src_cost = 10000, src_eqv_cost = 10000, src_folded_cost = 10000;
5642 int src_related_cost = 10000, src_elt_cost = 10000;
5643 /* Set non-zero if we need to call force_const_mem on with the
5644 contents of src_folded before using it. */
5645 int src_folded_force_flag = 0;
5646
5647 dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
5648 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
5649
5650 /* If SRC is a constant that has no machine mode,
5651 hash it with the destination's machine mode.
5652 This way we can keep different modes separate. */
5653
5654 mode = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
5655 sets[i].mode = mode;
5656
5657 if (src_eqv)
5658 {
5659 enum machine_mode eqvmode = mode;
5660 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5661 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
5662 do_not_record = 0;
5663 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5664 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5665 src_eqv = fold_rtx (src_eqv, insn);
5666 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
5667
5668 /* Find the equivalence class for the equivalent expression. */
5669
5670 if (!do_not_record)
5671 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
5672
5673 src_eqv_volatile = do_not_record;
5674 src_eqv_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5675 src_eqv_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5676 }
5677
5678 /* If this is a STRICT_LOW_PART assignment, src_eqv corresponds to the
5679 value of the INNER register, not the destination. So it is not
5680 a legal substitution for the source. But save it for later. */
5681 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
5682 src_eqv_here = 0;
5683 else
5684 src_eqv_here = src_eqv;
5685
5686 /* Simplify and foldable subexpressions in SRC. Then get the fully-
5687 simplified result, which may not necessarily be valid. */
5688 src_folded = fold_rtx (src, insn);
5689
5690 /* If storing a constant in a bitfield, pre-truncate the constant
5691 so we will be able to record it later. */
5692 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
5693 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
5694 {
5695 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
5696
5697 if (GET_CODE (src) == CONST_INT
5698 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
5699 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
5700 && (INTVAL (src) & ((-1) << INTVAL (width))))
5701 src_folded = gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
5702 INTVAL (src) & ((1 << INTVAL (width)) - 1));
5703 }
5704
5705 /* Compute SRC's hash code, and also notice if it
5706 should not be recorded at all. In that case,
5707 prevent any further processing of this assignment. */
5708 do_not_record = 0;
5709 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
5710 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
5711
5712 sets[i].src = src;
5713 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
5714 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
5715 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
5716 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
5717
5718 /* If source is a perverse subreg (such as QI treated as an SI),
5719 treat it as volatile. It may do the work of an SI in one context
5720 where the extra bits are not being used, but cannot replace an SI
5721 in general. */
5722 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
5723 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
5724 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
5725 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
5726
5727 /* Locate all possible equivalent forms for SRC. Try to replace
5728 SRC in the insn with each cheaper equivalent.
5729
5730 We have the following types of equivalents: SRC itself, a folded
5731 version, a value given in a REG_EQUAL note, or a value related
5732 to a constant.
5733
5734 Each of these equivalents may be part of an additional class
5735 of equivalents (if more than one is in the table, they must be in
5736 the same class; we check for this).
5737
5738 If the source is volatile, we don't do any table lookups.
5739
5740 We note any constant equivalent for possible later use in a
5741 REG_NOTE. */
5742
5743 if (!sets[i].src_volatile)
5744 elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
5745
5746 sets[i].src_elt = elt;
5747
5748 if (elt && src_eqv_here && src_eqv_elt)
5749 {
5750 if (elt->first_same_value != src_eqv_elt->first_same_value)
5751 {
5752 /* The REG_EQUAL is indicating that two formerly distinct
5753 classes are now equivalent. So merge them. */
5754 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_eqv_elt);
5755 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, elt->mode);
5756 src_eqv_elt = lookup (src_eqv, src_eqv_hash_code, elt->mode);
5757 }
5758
5759 src_eqv_here = 0;
5760 }
5761
5762 else if (src_eqv_elt)
5763 elt = src_eqv_elt;
5764
5765 /* Try to find a constant somewhere and record it in `src_const'.
5766 Record its table element, if any, in `src_const_elt'. Look in
5767 any known equivalences first. (If the constant is not in the
5768 table, also set `sets[i].src_const_hash_code'). */
5769 if (elt)
5770 for (p = elt->first_same_value; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5771 if (p->is_const)
5772 {
5773 src_const = p->exp;
5774 src_const_elt = elt;
5775 break;
5776 }
5777
5778 if (src_const == 0
5779 && (CONSTANT_P (src_folded)
5780 /* Consider (minus (label_ref L1) (label_ref L2)) as
5781 "constant" here so we will record it. This allows us
5782 to fold switch statements when an ADDR_DIFF_VEC is used. */
5783 || (GET_CODE (src_folded) == MINUS
5784 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 0)) == LABEL_REF
5785 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_folded, 1)) == LABEL_REF)))
5786 src_const = src_folded, src_const_elt = elt;
5787 else if (src_const == 0 && src_eqv_here && CONSTANT_P (src_eqv_here))
5788 src_const = src_eqv_here, src_const_elt = src_eqv_elt;
5789
5790 /* If we don't know if the constant is in the table, get its
5791 hash code and look it up. */
5792 if (src_const && src_const_elt == 0)
5793 {
5794 sets[i].src_const_hash_code = HASH (src_const, mode);
5795 src_const_elt = lookup (src_const, sets[i].src_const_hash_code,
5796 mode);
5797 }
5798
5799 sets[i].src_const = src_const;
5800 sets[i].src_const_elt = src_const_elt;
5801
5802 /* If the constant and our source are both in the table, mark them as
5803 equivalent. Otherwise, if a constant is in the table but the source
5804 isn't, set ELT to it. */
5805 if (src_const_elt && elt
5806 && src_const_elt->first_same_value != elt->first_same_value)
5807 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_const_elt);
5808 else if (src_const_elt && elt == 0)
5809 elt = src_const_elt;
5810
5811 /* See if there is a register linearly related to a constant
5812 equivalent of SRC. */
5813 if (src_const
5814 && (GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST
5815 || (src_const_elt && src_const_elt->related_value != 0)))
5816 {
5817 src_related = use_related_value (src_const, src_const_elt);
5818 if (src_related)
5819 {
5820 struct table_elt *src_related_elt
5821 = lookup (src_related, HASH (src_related, mode), mode);
5822 if (src_related_elt && elt)
5823 {
5824 if (elt->first_same_value
5825 != src_related_elt->first_same_value)
5826 /* This can occur when we previously saw a CONST
5827 involving a SYMBOL_REF and then see the SYMBOL_REF
5828 twice. Merge the involved classes. */
5829 merge_equiv_classes (elt, src_related_elt);
5830
5831 src_related = 0;
5832 src_related_elt = 0;
5833 }
5834 else if (src_related_elt && elt == 0)
5835 elt = src_related_elt;
5836 }
5837 }
5838
d45cf215
RS
5839 /* Another possibility is that we have an AND with a constant in
5840 a mode narrower than a word. If so, it might have been generated
5841 as part of an "if" which would narrow the AND. If we already
5842 have done the AND in a wider mode, we can use a SUBREG of that
5843 value. */
5844
5845 if (flag_expensive_optimizations && ! src_related
5846 && GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 1)) == CONST_INT
5847 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
5848 {
5849 enum machine_mode tmode;
5850 rtx new_and = gen_rtx (AND, VOIDmode, 0, XEXP (src, 1));
5851
5852 for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
5853 GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD;
5854 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
5855 {
5856 rtx inner = gen_lowpart_if_possible (tmode, XEXP (src, 0));
5857 struct table_elt *larger_elt;
5858
5859 if (inner)
5860 {
5861 PUT_MODE (new_and, tmode);
5862 XEXP (new_and, 0) = inner;
5863 larger_elt = lookup (new_and, HASH (new_and, tmode), tmode);
5864 if (larger_elt == 0)
5865 continue;
5866
5867 for (larger_elt = larger_elt->first_same_value;
5868 larger_elt; larger_elt = larger_elt->next_same_value)
5869 if (GET_CODE (larger_elt->exp) == REG)
5870 {
5871 src_related
5872 = gen_lowpart_if_possible (mode, larger_elt->exp);
5873 break;
5874 }
5875
5876 if (src_related)
5877 break;
5878 }
5879 }
5880 }
5881
7afe21cc
RK
5882 if (src == src_folded)
5883 src_folded = 0;
5884
5885 /* At this point, ELT, if non-zero, points to a class of expressions
5886 equivalent to the source of this SET and SRC, SRC_EQV, SRC_FOLDED,
5887 and SRC_RELATED, if non-zero, each contain additional equivalent
5888 expressions. Prune these latter expressions by deleting expressions
5889 already in the equivalence class.
5890
5891 Check for an equivalent identical to the destination. If found,
5892 this is the preferred equivalent since it will likely lead to
5893 elimination of the insn. Indicate this by placing it in
5894 `src_related'. */
5895
5896 if (elt) elt = elt->first_same_value;
5897 for (p = elt; p; p = p->next_same_value)
5898 {
5899 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (p->exp);
5900
5901 /* If the expression is not valid, ignore it. Then we do not
5902 have to check for validity below. In most cases, we can use
5903 `rtx_equal_p', since canonicalization has already been done. */
5904 if (code != REG && ! exp_equiv_p (p->exp, p->exp, 1, 0))
5905 continue;
5906
5907 if (src && GET_CODE (src) == code && rtx_equal_p (src, p->exp))
5908 src = 0;
5909 else if (src_folded && GET_CODE (src_folded) == code
5910 && rtx_equal_p (src_folded, p->exp))
5911 src_folded = 0;
5912 else if (src_eqv_here && GET_CODE (src_eqv_here) == code
5913 && rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, p->exp))
5914 src_eqv_here = 0;
5915 else if (src_related && GET_CODE (src_related) == code
5916 && rtx_equal_p (src_related, p->exp))
5917 src_related = 0;
5918
5919 /* This is the same as the destination of the insns, we want
5920 to prefer it. Copy it to src_related. The code below will
5921 then give it a negative cost. */
5922 if (GET_CODE (dest) == code && rtx_equal_p (p->exp, dest))
5923 src_related = dest;
5924
5925 }
5926
5927 /* Find the cheapest valid equivalent, trying all the available
5928 possibilities. Prefer items not in the hash table to ones
5929 that are when they are equal cost. Note that we can never
5930 worsen an insn as the current contents will also succeed.
05c33dd8 5931 If we find an equivalent identical to the destination, use it as best,
7afe21cc
RK
5932 since this insn will probably be eliminated in that case. */
5933 if (src)
5934 {
5935 if (rtx_equal_p (src, dest))
5936 src_cost = -1;
5937 else
5938 src_cost = COST (src);
5939 }
5940
5941 if (src_eqv_here)
5942 {
5943 if (rtx_equal_p (src_eqv_here, dest))
5944 src_eqv_cost = -1;
5945 else
5946 src_eqv_cost = COST (src_eqv_here);
5947 }
5948
5949 if (src_folded)
5950 {
5951 if (rtx_equal_p (src_folded, dest))
5952 src_folded_cost = -1;
5953 else
5954 src_folded_cost = COST (src_folded);
5955 }
5956
5957 if (src_related)
5958 {
5959 if (rtx_equal_p (src_related, dest))
5960 src_related_cost = -1;
5961 else
5962 src_related_cost = COST (src_related);
5963 }
5964
5965 /* If this was an indirect jump insn, a known label will really be
5966 cheaper even though it looks more expensive. */
5967 if (dest == pc_rtx && src_const && GET_CODE (src_const) == LABEL_REF)
5968 src_folded = src_const, src_folded_cost = -1;
5969
5970 /* Terminate loop when replacement made. This must terminate since
5971 the current contents will be tested and will always be valid. */
5972 while (1)
5973 {
5974 rtx trial;
5975
5976 /* Skip invalid entries. */
5977 while (elt && GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
5978 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
5979 elt = elt->next_same_value;
5980
5981 if (elt) src_elt_cost = elt->cost;
5982
5983 /* Find cheapest and skip it for the next time. For items
5984 of equal cost, use this order:
5985 src_folded, src, src_eqv, src_related and hash table entry. */
5986 if (src_folded_cost <= src_cost
5987 && src_folded_cost <= src_eqv_cost
5988 && src_folded_cost <= src_related_cost
5989 && src_folded_cost <= src_elt_cost)
5990 {
5991 trial = src_folded, src_folded_cost = 10000;
5992 if (src_folded_force_flag)
5993 trial = force_const_mem (mode, trial);
5994 }
5995 else if (src_cost <= src_eqv_cost
5996 && src_cost <= src_related_cost
5997 && src_cost <= src_elt_cost)
5998 trial = src, src_cost = 10000;
5999 else if (src_eqv_cost <= src_related_cost
6000 && src_eqv_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6001 trial = src_eqv_here, src_eqv_cost = 10000;
6002 else if (src_related_cost <= src_elt_cost)
6003 trial = src_related, src_related_cost = 10000;
6004 else
6005 {
05c33dd8 6006 trial = copy_rtx (elt->exp);
7afe21cc
RK
6007 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6008 src_elt_cost = 10000;
6009 }
6010
6011 /* We don't normally have an insn matching (set (pc) (pc)), so
6012 check for this separately here. We will delete such an
6013 insn below.
6014
6015 Tablejump insns contain a USE of the table, so simply replacing
6016 the operand with the constant won't match. This is simply an
6017 unconditional branch, however, and is therefore valid. Just
6018 insert the substitution here and we will delete and re-emit
6019 the insn later. */
6020
6021 if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx
6022 && (trial == pc_rtx
6023 || (GET_CODE (trial) == LABEL_REF
6024 && ! condjump_p (insn))))
6025 {
6026 /* If TRIAL is a label in front of a jump table, we are
6027 really falling through the switch (this is how casesi
6028 insns work), so we must branch around the table. */
6029 if (GET_CODE (trial) == CODE_LABEL
6030 && NEXT_INSN (trial) != 0
6031 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (trial)) == JUMP_INSN
6032 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_DIFF_VEC
6033 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (trial))) == ADDR_VEC))
6034
6035 trial = gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, get_label_after (trial));
6036
6037 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = trial;
6038 break;
6039 }
6040
6041 /* Look for a substitution that makes a valid insn. */
6042 else if (validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), trial, 0))
05c33dd8
RK
6043 {
6044 SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl) = canon_reg (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), insn);
6045 break;
6046 }
7afe21cc
RK
6047
6048 /* If we previously found constant pool entries for
6049 constants and this is a constant, try making a
6050 pool entry. Put it in src_folded unless we already have done
6051 this since that is where it likely came from. */
6052
6053 else if (constant_pool_entries_cost
6054 && CONSTANT_P (trial)
6055 && (src_folded == 0 || GET_CODE (src_folded) != MEM)
6056 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_CC)
6057 {
6058 src_folded_force_flag = 1;
6059 src_folded = trial;
6060 src_folded_cost = constant_pool_entries_cost;
6061 }
6062 }
6063
6064 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl);
6065
6066 /* In general, it is good to have a SET with SET_SRC == SET_DEST.
6067 However, there is an important exception: If both are registers
6068 that are not the head of their equivalence class, replace SET_SRC
6069 with the head of the class. If we do not do this, we will have
6070 both registers live over a portion of the basic block. This way,
6071 their lifetimes will likely abut instead of overlapping. */
6072 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG
6073 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
6074 && qty_mode[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == GET_MODE (dest)
6075 && qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] != REGNO (dest)
6076 && GET_CODE (src) == REG && REGNO (src) == REGNO (dest)
6077 /* Don't do this if the original insn had a hard reg as
6078 SET_SRC. */
6079 && (GET_CODE (sets[i].src) != REG
6080 || REGNO (sets[i].src) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
6081 /* We can't call canon_reg here because it won't do anything if
6082 SRC is a hard register. */
6083 {
6084 int first = qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (src)]];
6085
6086 src = SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl)
6087 = first >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER ? regno_reg_rtx[first]
6088 : gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (src), first);
6089
6090 /* If we had a constant that is cheaper than what we are now
6091 setting SRC to, use that constant. We ignored it when we
6092 thought we could make this into a no-op. */
6093 if (src_const && COST (src_const) < COST (src)
6094 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), src_const, 0))
6095 src = src_const;
6096 }
6097
6098 /* If we made a change, recompute SRC values. */
6099 if (src != sets[i].src)
6100 {
6101 do_not_record = 0;
6102 hash_arg_in_memory = 0;
6103 hash_arg_in_struct = 0;
6104 sets[i].src = src;
6105 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
6106 sets[i].src_volatile = do_not_record;
6107 sets[i].src_in_memory = hash_arg_in_memory;
6108 sets[i].src_in_struct = hash_arg_in_struct;
6109 sets[i].src_elt = lookup (src, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
6110 }
6111
6112 /* If this is a single SET, we are setting a register, and we have an
6113 equivalent constant, we want to add a REG_NOTE. We don't want
6114 to write a REG_EQUAL note for a constant pseudo since verifying that
d45cf215 6115 that pseudo hasn't been eliminated is a pain. Such a note also
7afe21cc
RK
6116 won't help anything. */
6117 if (n_sets == 1 && src_const && GET_CODE (dest) == REG
6118 && GET_CODE (src_const) != REG)
6119 {
6120 rtx tem = find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, 0);
6121
6122 /* Record the actual constant value in a REG_EQUAL note, making
6123 a new one if one does not already exist. */
6124 if (tem)
6125 XEXP (tem, 0) = src_const;
6126 else
6127 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, REG_EQUAL,
6128 src_const, REG_NOTES (insn));
6129
6130 /* If storing a constant value in a register that
6131 previously held the constant value 0,
6132 record this fact with a REG_WAS_0 note on this insn.
6133
6134 Note that the *register* is required to have previously held 0,
6135 not just any register in the quantity and we must point to the
6136 insn that set that register to zero.
6137
6138 Rather than track each register individually, we just see if
6139 the last set for this quantity was for this register. */
6140
6141 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (dest))
6142 && qty_const[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]] == const0_rtx)
6143 {
6144 /* See if we previously had a REG_WAS_0 note. */
6145 rtx note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, 0);
6146 rtx const_insn = qty_const_insn[reg_qty[REGNO (dest)]];
6147
6148 if ((tem = single_set (const_insn)) != 0
6149 && rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (tem), dest))
6150 {
6151 if (note)
6152 XEXP (note, 0) = const_insn;
6153 else
6154 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx (INSN_LIST, REG_WAS_0,
6155 const_insn, REG_NOTES (insn));
6156 }
6157 }
6158 }
6159
6160 /* Now deal with the destination. */
6161 do_not_record = 0;
6162 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6163
6164 /* Look within any SIGN_EXTRACT or ZERO_EXTRACT
6165 to the MEM or REG within it. */
6166 while (GET_CODE (dest) == SIGN_EXTRACT
6167 || GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6168 || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6169 || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6170 {
6171 sets[i].inner_dest_loc = &XEXP (dest, 0);
6172 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
6173 }
6174
6175 sets[i].inner_dest = dest;
6176
6177 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6178 {
6179 dest = fold_rtx (dest, insn);
6180
6181 /* Decide whether we invalidate everything in memory,
6182 or just things at non-fixed places.
6183 Writing a large aggregate must invalidate everything
6184 because we don't know how long it is. */
6185 note_mem_written (dest, &writes_memory);
6186 }
6187
6188 /* Compute the hash code of the destination now,
6189 before the effects of this instruction are recorded,
6190 since the register values used in the address computation
6191 are those before this instruction. */
6192 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, mode);
6193
6194 /* Don't enter a bit-field in the hash table
6195 because the value in it after the store
6196 may not equal what was stored, due to truncation. */
6197
6198 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
6199 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == SIGN_EXTRACT)
6200 {
6201 rtx width = XEXP (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), 1);
6202
6203 if (src_const != 0 && GET_CODE (src_const) == CONST_INT
6204 && GET_CODE (width) == CONST_INT
6205 && INTVAL (width) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
6206 && ! (INTVAL (src_const) & ((-1) << INTVAL (width))))
6207 /* Exception: if the value is constant,
6208 and it won't be truncated, record it. */
6209 ;
6210 else
6211 {
6212 /* This is chosen so that the destination will be invalidated
6213 but no new value will be recorded.
6214 We must invalidate because sometimes constant
6215 values can be recorded for bitfields. */
6216 sets[i].src_elt = 0;
6217 sets[i].src_volatile = 1;
6218 src_eqv = 0;
6219 src_eqv_elt = 0;
6220 }
6221 }
6222
6223 /* If only one set in a JUMP_INSN and it is now a no-op, we can delete
6224 the insn. */
6225 else if (n_sets == 1 && dest == pc_rtx && src == pc_rtx)
6226 {
6227 PUT_CODE (insn, NOTE);
6228 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
6229 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (insn) = 0;
6230 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6231 /* One less use of the label this insn used to jump to. */
6232 --LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (insn));
6233 /* No more processing for this set. */
6234 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6235 }
6236
6237 /* If this SET is now setting PC to a label, we know it used to
6238 be a conditional or computed branch. So we see if we can follow
6239 it. If it was a computed branch, delete it and re-emit. */
6240 else if (dest == pc_rtx && GET_CODE (src) == LABEL_REF)
6241 {
6242 rtx p;
6243
6244 /* If this is not in the format for a simple branch and
6245 we are the only SET in it, re-emit it. */
6246 if (! simplejump_p (insn) && n_sets == 1)
6247 {
6248 rtx new = emit_jump_insn_before (gen_jump (XEXP (src, 0)), insn);
6249 JUMP_LABEL (new) = XEXP (src, 0);
6250 LABEL_NUSES (XEXP (src, 0))++;
6251 delete_insn (insn);
6252 insn = new;
6253 }
6254
6255 /* Now that we've converted this jump to an unconditional jump,
6256 there is dead code after it. Delete the dead code until we
6257 reach a BARRIER, the end of the function, or a label. Do
6258 not delete NOTEs except for NOTE_INSN_DELETED since later
6259 phases assume these notes are retained. */
6260
6261 p = insn;
6262
6263 while (NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6264 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != BARRIER
6265 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != CODE_LABEL)
6266 {
6267 if (GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) != NOTE
6268 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (NEXT_INSN (p)) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)
6269 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6270 else
6271 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
6272 }
6273
6274 /* If we don't have a BARRIER immediately after INSN, put one there.
6275 Much code assumes that there are no NOTEs between a JUMP_INSN and
6276 BARRIER. */
6277
6278 if (NEXT_INSN (insn) == 0
6279 || GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (insn)) != BARRIER)
6280 emit_barrier_after (insn);
6281
6282 /* We might have two BARRIERs separated by notes. Delete the second
6283 one if so. */
6284
538b78e7
RS
6285 if (p != insn && NEXT_INSN (p) != 0
6286 && GET_CODE (NEXT_INSN (p)) == BARRIER)
7afe21cc
RK
6287 delete_insn (NEXT_INSN (p));
6288
6289 cse_jumps_altered = 1;
6290 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6291 }
6292
c2a47e48
RK
6293 /* If destination is volatile, invalidate it and then do no further
6294 processing for this assignment. */
7afe21cc
RK
6295
6296 else if (do_not_record)
c2a47e48
RK
6297 {
6298 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6299 || GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6300 invalidate (dest);
6301 sets[i].rtl = 0;
6302 }
7afe21cc
RK
6303
6304 if (sets[i].rtl != 0 && dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl))
6305 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl), mode);
6306
6307#ifdef HAVE_cc0
6308 /* If setting CC0, record what it was set to, or a constant, if it
6309 is equivalent to a constant. If it is being set to a floating-point
6310 value, make a COMPARE with the appropriate constant of 0. If we
6311 don't do this, later code can interpret this as a test against
6312 const0_rtx, which can cause problems if we try to put it into an
6313 insn as a floating-point operand. */
6314 if (dest == cc0_rtx)
6315 {
6316 this_insn_cc0 = src_const && mode != VOIDmode ? src_const : src;
6317 this_insn_cc0_mode = mode;
6318 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT)
6319 this_insn_cc0 = gen_rtx (COMPARE, VOIDmode, this_insn_cc0,
6320 CONST0_RTX (mode));
6321 }
6322#endif
6323 }
6324
6325 /* Now enter all non-volatile source expressions in the hash table
6326 if they are not already present.
6327 Record their equivalence classes in src_elt.
6328 This way we can insert the corresponding destinations into
6329 the same classes even if the actual sources are no longer in them
6330 (having been invalidated). */
6331
6332 if (src_eqv && src_eqv_elt == 0 && sets[0].rtl != 0 && ! src_eqv_volatile
6333 && ! rtx_equal_p (src_eqv, SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)))
6334 {
6335 register struct table_elt *elt;
6336 register struct table_elt *classp = sets[0].src_elt;
6337 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6338 enum machine_mode eqvmode = GET_MODE (dest);
6339
6340 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6341 {
6342 eqvmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0)));
6343 classp = 0;
6344 }
6345 if (insert_regs (src_eqv, classp, 0))
6346 src_eqv_hash_code = HASH (src_eqv, eqvmode);
6347 elt = insert (src_eqv, classp, src_eqv_hash_code, eqvmode);
6348 elt->in_memory = src_eqv_in_memory;
6349 elt->in_struct = src_eqv_in_struct;
6350 src_eqv_elt = elt;
6351 }
6352
6353 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6354 if (sets[i].rtl && ! sets[i].src_volatile
6355 && ! rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (sets[i].rtl), SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)))
6356 {
6357 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6358 {
6359 /* REG_EQUAL in setting a STRICT_LOW_PART
6360 gives an equivalent for the entire destination register,
6361 not just for the subreg being stored in now.
6362 This is a more interesting equivalence, so we arrange later
6363 to treat the entire reg as the destination. */
6364 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6365 sets[i].src_hash_code = src_eqv_hash_code;
6366 }
6367 else
6368 {
6369 /* Insert source and constant equivalent into hash table, if not
6370 already present. */
6371 register struct table_elt *classp = src_eqv_elt;
6372 register rtx src = sets[i].src;
6373 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6374 enum machine_mode mode
6375 = GET_MODE (src) == VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (dest) : GET_MODE (src);
6376
6377 if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6378 {
6379 register struct table_elt *elt;
6380
6381 /* Note that these insert_regs calls cannot remove
6382 any of the src_elt's, because they would have failed to
6383 match if not still valid. */
6384 if (insert_regs (src, classp, 0))
6385 sets[i].src_hash_code = HASH (src, mode);
6386 elt = insert (src, classp, sets[i].src_hash_code, mode);
6387 elt->in_memory = sets[i].src_in_memory;
6388 elt->in_struct = sets[i].src_in_struct;
6389 sets[i].src_elt = classp = elt;
6390 }
6391
6392 if (sets[i].src_const && sets[i].src_const_elt == 0
6393 && src != sets[i].src_const
6394 && ! rtx_equal_p (sets[i].src_const, src))
6395 sets[i].src_elt = insert (sets[i].src_const, classp,
6396 sets[i].src_const_hash_code, mode);
6397 }
6398 }
6399 else if (sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6400 /* If we did not insert the source into the hash table (e.g., it was
6401 volatile), note the equivalence class for the REG_EQUAL value, if any,
6402 so that the destination goes into that class. */
6403 sets[i].src_elt = src_eqv_elt;
6404
6405 invalidate_from_clobbers (&writes_memory, x);
77fa0940
RK
6406
6407 /* Some registers are invalidated by subroutine calls. Memory is
6408 invalidated by non-constant calls. */
6409
7afe21cc
RK
6410 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
6411 {
6412 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
77fa0940
RK
6413
6414 if (! CONST_CALL_P (insn))
6415 invalidate_memory (&everything);
7afe21cc
RK
6416 invalidate_for_call ();
6417 }
6418
6419 /* Now invalidate everything set by this instruction.
6420 If a SUBREG or other funny destination is being set,
6421 sets[i].rtl is still nonzero, so here we invalidate the reg
6422 a part of which is being set. */
6423
6424 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6425 if (sets[i].rtl)
6426 {
6427 register rtx dest = sets[i].inner_dest;
6428
6429 /* Needed for registers to remove the register from its
6430 previous quantity's chain.
6431 Needed for memory if this is a nonvarying address, unless
6432 we have just done an invalidate_memory that covers even those. */
6433 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6434 || (! writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
6435 invalidate (dest);
6436 }
6437
6438 /* Make sure registers mentioned in destinations
6439 are safe for use in an expression to be inserted.
6440 This removes from the hash table
6441 any invalid entry that refers to one of these registers.
6442
6443 We don't care about the return value from mention_regs because
6444 we are going to hash the SET_DEST values unconditionally. */
6445
6446 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6447 if (sets[i].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl)) != REG)
6448 mention_regs (SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
6449
6450 /* We may have just removed some of the src_elt's from the hash table.
6451 So replace each one with the current head of the same class. */
6452
6453 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6454 if (sets[i].rtl)
6455 {
6456 if (sets[i].src_elt && sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value == 0)
6457 /* If elt was removed, find current head of same class,
6458 or 0 if nothing remains of that class. */
6459 {
6460 register struct table_elt *elt = sets[i].src_elt;
6461
6462 while (elt && elt->prev_same_value)
6463 elt = elt->prev_same_value;
6464
6465 while (elt && elt->first_same_value == 0)
6466 elt = elt->next_same_value;
6467 sets[i].src_elt = elt ? elt->first_same_value : 0;
6468 }
6469 }
6470
6471 /* Now insert the destinations into their equivalence classes. */
6472
6473 for (i = 0; i < n_sets; i++)
6474 if (sets[i].rtl)
6475 {
6476 register rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl);
6477 register struct table_elt *elt;
6478
6479 /* Don't record value if we are not supposed to risk allocating
6480 floating-point values in registers that might be wider than
6481 memory. */
6482 if ((flag_float_store
6483 && GET_CODE (dest) == MEM
6484 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (dest)) == MODE_FLOAT)
6485 /* Don't record values of destinations set inside a libcall block
6486 since we might delete the libcall. Things should have been set
6487 up so we won't want to reuse such a value, but we play it safe
6488 here. */
6489 || in_libcall_block
6490 /* If we didn't put a REG_EQUAL value or a source into the hash
6491 table, there is no point is recording DEST. */
6492 || sets[i].src_elt == 0)
6493 continue;
6494
6495 /* STRICT_LOW_PART isn't part of the value BEING set,
6496 and neither is the SUBREG inside it.
6497 Note that in this case SETS[I].SRC_ELT is really SRC_EQV_ELT. */
6498 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
6499 dest = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
6500
c610adec 6501 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
7afe21cc
RK
6502 /* Registers must also be inserted into chains for quantities. */
6503 if (insert_regs (dest, sets[i].src_elt, 1))
6504 /* If `insert_regs' changes something, the hash code must be
6505 recalculated. */
6506 sets[i].dest_hash_code = HASH (dest, GET_MODE (dest));
6507
6508 elt = insert (dest, sets[i].src_elt,
6509 sets[i].dest_hash_code, GET_MODE (dest));
6510 elt->in_memory = GET_CODE (sets[i].inner_dest) == MEM;
6511 if (elt->in_memory)
6512 {
6513 /* This implicitly assumes a whole struct
6514 need not have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P.
6515 But a whole struct is *supposed* to have MEM_IN_STRUCT_P. */
6516 elt->in_struct = (MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (sets[i].inner_dest)
6517 || sets[i].inner_dest != SET_DEST (sets[i].rtl));
6518 }
6519
fc3ffe83
RK
6520 /* If we have (set (subreg:m1 (reg:m2 foo) 0) (bar:m1)), M1 is no
6521 narrower than M2, and both M1 and M2 are the same number of words,
6522 we are also doing (set (reg:m2 foo) (subreg:m2 (bar:m1) 0)) so
6523 make that equivalence as well.
7afe21cc
RK
6524
6525 However, BAR may have equivalences for which gen_lowpart_if_possible
6526 will produce a simpler value than gen_lowpart_if_possible applied to
6527 BAR (e.g., if BAR was ZERO_EXTENDed from M2), so we will scan all
6528 BAR's equivalences. If we don't get a simplified form, make
6529 the SUBREG. It will not be used in an equivalence, but will
6530 cause two similar assignments to be detected.
6531
6532 Note the loop below will find SUBREG_REG (DEST) since we have
6533 already entered SRC and DEST of the SET in the table. */
6534
6535 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
fc3ffe83
RK
6536 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))) / UNITS_PER_WORD
6537 == GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
7afe21cc
RK
6538 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
6539 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest))))
6540 && sets[i].src_elt != 0)
6541 {
6542 enum machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest));
6543 struct table_elt *elt, *classp = 0;
6544
6545 for (elt = sets[i].src_elt->first_same_value; elt;
6546 elt = elt->next_same_value)
6547 {
6548 rtx new_src = 0;
6549 int src_hash;
6550 struct table_elt *src_elt;
6551
6552 /* Ignore invalid entries. */
6553 if (GET_CODE (elt->exp) != REG
6554 && ! exp_equiv_p (elt->exp, elt->exp, 1, 0))
6555 continue;
6556
6557 new_src = gen_lowpart_if_possible (new_mode, elt->exp);
6558 if (new_src == 0)
6559 new_src = gen_rtx (SUBREG, new_mode, elt->exp, 0);
6560
6561 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6562 src_elt = lookup (new_src, src_hash, new_mode);
6563
6564 /* Put the new source in the hash table is if isn't
6565 already. */
6566 if (src_elt == 0)
6567 {
6568 if (insert_regs (new_src, classp, 0))
6569 src_hash = HASH (new_src, new_mode);
6570 src_elt = insert (new_src, classp, src_hash, new_mode);
6571 src_elt->in_memory = elt->in_memory;
6572 src_elt->in_struct = elt->in_struct;
6573 }
6574 else if (classp && classp != src_elt->first_same_value)
6575 /* Show that two things that we've seen before are
6576 actually the same. */
6577 merge_equiv_classes (src_elt, classp);
6578
6579 classp = src_elt->first_same_value;
6580 }
6581 }
6582 }
6583
6584 /* Special handling for (set REG0 REG1)
6585 where REG0 is the "cheapest", cheaper than REG1.
6586 After cse, REG1 will probably not be used in the sequel,
6587 so (if easily done) change this insn to (set REG1 REG0) and
6588 replace REG1 with REG0 in the previous insn that computed their value.
6589 Then REG1 will become a dead store and won't cloud the situation
6590 for later optimizations.
6591
6592 Do not make this change if REG1 is a hard register, because it will
6593 then be used in the sequel and we may be changing a two-operand insn
6594 into a three-operand insn.
6595
6596 Also do not do this if we are operating on a copy of INSN. */
6597
6598 if (n_sets == 1 && sets[0].rtl && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
6599 && NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) == insn
6600 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) == REG
6601 && REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6602 && REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl)))
6603 && (qty_first_reg[reg_qty[REGNO (SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))]]
6604 == REGNO (SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl))))
6605 {
6606 rtx prev = PREV_INSN (insn);
6607 while (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == NOTE)
6608 prev = PREV_INSN (prev);
6609
6610 if (prev && GET_CODE (prev) == INSN && GET_CODE (PATTERN (prev)) == SET
6611 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)) == SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl))
6612 {
6613 rtx dest = SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl);
6614 rtx note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_EQUIV, 0);
6615
6616 validate_change (prev, & SET_DEST (PATTERN (prev)), dest, 1);
6617 validate_change (insn, & SET_DEST (sets[0].rtl),
6618 SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), 1);
6619 validate_change (insn, & SET_SRC (sets[0].rtl), dest, 1);
6620 apply_change_group ();
6621
6622 /* If REG1 was equivalent to a constant, REG0 is not. */
6623 if (note)
6624 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_EQUAL);
6625
6626 /* If there was a REG_WAS_0 note on PREV, remove it. Move
6627 any REG_WAS_0 note on INSN to PREV. */
6628 note = find_reg_note (prev, REG_WAS_0, 0);
6629 if (note)
6630 remove_note (prev, note);
6631
6632 note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_WAS_0, 0);
6633 if (note)
6634 {
6635 remove_note (insn, note);
6636 XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (prev);
6637 REG_NOTES (prev) = note;
6638 }
6639 }
6640 }
6641
6642 /* If this is a conditional jump insn, record any known equivalences due to
6643 the condition being tested. */
6644
6645 last_jump_equiv_class = 0;
6646 if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN
6647 && n_sets == 1 && GET_CODE (x) == SET
6648 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == IF_THEN_ELSE)
6649 record_jump_equiv (insn, 0);
6650
6651#ifdef HAVE_cc0
6652 /* If the previous insn set CC0 and this insn no longer references CC0,
6653 delete the previous insn. Here we use the fact that nothing expects CC0
6654 to be valid over an insn, which is true until the final pass. */
6655 if (prev_insn && GET_CODE (prev_insn) == INSN
6656 && (tem = single_set (prev_insn)) != 0
6657 && SET_DEST (tem) == cc0_rtx
6658 && ! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, x))
6659 {
6660 PUT_CODE (prev_insn, NOTE);
6661 NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (prev_insn) = NOTE_INSN_DELETED;
6662 NOTE_SOURCE_FILE (prev_insn) = 0;
6663 }
6664
6665 prev_insn_cc0 = this_insn_cc0;
6666 prev_insn_cc0_mode = this_insn_cc0_mode;
6667#endif
6668
6669 prev_insn = insn;
6670}
6671\f
6672/* Store 1 in *WRITES_PTR for those categories of memory ref
6673 that must be invalidated when the expression WRITTEN is stored in.
6674 If WRITTEN is null, say everything must be invalidated. */
6675
6676static void
6677note_mem_written (written, writes_ptr)
6678 rtx written;
6679 struct write_data *writes_ptr;
6680{
6681 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
6682
6683 if (written == 0)
6684 *writes_ptr = everything;
6685 else if (GET_CODE (written) == MEM)
6686 {
6687 /* Pushing or popping the stack invalidates just the stack pointer. */
6688 rtx addr = XEXP (written, 0);
6689 if ((GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == PRE_INC
6690 || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_DEC || GET_CODE (addr) == POST_INC)
6691 && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG
6692 && REGNO (XEXP (addr, 0)) == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
6693 {
6694 writes_ptr->sp = 1;
6695 return;
6696 }
6697 else if (GET_MODE (written) == BLKmode)
6698 *writes_ptr = everything;
6699 else if (cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (written))
6700 {
6701 /* A varying address that is a sum indicates an array element,
6702 and that's just as good as a structure element
6703 in implying that we need not invalidate scalar variables. */
6704 if (!(MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (written)
6705 || GET_CODE (XEXP (written, 0)) == PLUS))
6706 writes_ptr->all = 1;
6707 writes_ptr->nonscalar = 1;
6708 }
6709 writes_ptr->var = 1;
6710 }
6711}
6712
6713/* Perform invalidation on the basis of everything about an insn
6714 except for invalidating the actual places that are SET in it.
6715 This includes the places CLOBBERed, and anything that might
6716 alias with something that is SET or CLOBBERed.
6717
6718 W points to the writes_memory for this insn, a struct write_data
6719 saying which kinds of memory references must be invalidated.
6720 X is the pattern of the insn. */
6721
6722static void
6723invalidate_from_clobbers (w, x)
6724 struct write_data *w;
6725 rtx x;
6726{
6727 /* If W->var is not set, W specifies no action.
6728 If W->all is set, this step gets all memory refs
6729 so they can be ignored in the rest of this function. */
6730 if (w->var)
6731 invalidate_memory (w);
6732
6733 if (w->sp)
6734 {
6735 if (reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM] >= 0)
6736 reg_tick[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM]++;
6737
6738 /* This should be *very* rare. */
6739 if (TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (hard_regs_in_table, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM))
6740 invalidate (stack_pointer_rtx);
6741 }
6742
6743 if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
6744 {
6745 rtx ref = XEXP (x, 0);
6746 if (ref
6747 && (GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
6748 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && ! w->all)))
6749 invalidate (ref);
6750 }
6751 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
6752 {
6753 register int i;
6754 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6755 {
6756 register rtx y = XVECEXP (x, 0, i);
6757 if (GET_CODE (y) == CLOBBER)
6758 {
6759 rtx ref = XEXP (y, 0);
6760 if (ref
6761 &&(GET_CODE (ref) == REG || GET_CODE (ref) == SUBREG
6762 || (GET_CODE (ref) == MEM && !w->all)))
6763 invalidate (ref);
6764 }
6765 }
6766 }
6767}
6768\f
6769/* Process X, part of the REG_NOTES of an insn. Look at any REG_EQUAL notes
6770 and replace any registers in them with either an equivalent constant
6771 or the canonical form of the register. If we are inside an address,
6772 only do this if the address remains valid.
6773
6774 OBJECT is 0 except when within a MEM in which case it is the MEM.
6775
6776 Return the replacement for X. */
6777
6778static rtx
6779cse_process_notes (x, object)
6780 rtx x;
6781 rtx object;
6782{
6783 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
6784 char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6785 int qty;
6786 int i;
6787
6788 switch (code)
6789 {
6790 case CONST_INT:
6791 case CONST:
6792 case SYMBOL_REF:
6793 case LABEL_REF:
6794 case CONST_DOUBLE:
6795 case PC:
6796 case CC0:
6797 case LO_SUM:
6798 return x;
6799
6800 case MEM:
6801 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), x);
6802 return x;
6803
6804 case EXPR_LIST:
6805 case INSN_LIST:
6806 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
6807 XEXP (x, 0) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
6808 if (XEXP (x, 1))
6809 XEXP (x, 1) = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
6810 return x;
6811
e4890d45
RS
6812 case SIGN_EXTEND:
6813 case ZERO_EXTEND:
6814 {
6815 rtx new = cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, 0), object);
6816 /* We don't substitute VOIDmode constants into these rtx,
6817 since they would impede folding. */
6818 if (GET_MODE (new) != VOIDmode)
6819 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, 0), new, 0);
6820 return x;
6821 }
6822
7afe21cc
RK
6823 case REG:
6824 i = reg_qty[REGNO (x)];
6825
6826 /* Return a constant or a constant register. */
6827 if (REGNO_QTY_VALID_P (REGNO (x))
6828 && qty_const[i] != 0
6829 && (CONSTANT_P (qty_const[i])
6830 || GET_CODE (qty_const[i]) == REG))
6831 {
6832 rtx new = gen_lowpart_if_possible (GET_MODE (x), qty_const[i]);
6833 if (new)
6834 return new;
6835 }
6836
6837 /* Otherwise, canonicalize this register. */
6838 return canon_reg (x, 0);
6839 }
6840
6841 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
6842 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
6843 validate_change (object, &XEXP (x, i),
6844 cse_process_notes (XEXP (x, i), object), 0);
6845
6846 return x;
6847}
6848\f
6849/* Find common subexpressions between the end test of a loop and the beginning
6850 of the loop. LOOP_START is the CODE_LABEL at the start of a loop.
6851
6852 Often we have a loop where an expression in the exit test is used
6853 in the body of the loop. For example "while (*p) *q++ = *p++;".
6854 Because of the way we duplicate the loop exit test in front of the loop,
6855 however, we don't detect that common subexpression. This will be caught
6856 when global cse is implemented, but this is a quite common case.
6857
6858 This function handles the most common cases of these common expressions.
6859 It is called after we have processed the basic block ending with the
6860 NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END note that ends a loop and the previous JUMP_INSN
6861 jumps to a label used only once. */
6862
6863static void
6864cse_around_loop (loop_start)
6865 rtx loop_start;
6866{
6867 rtx insn;
6868 int i;
6869 struct table_elt *p;
6870
6871 /* If the jump at the end of the loop doesn't go to the start, we don't
6872 do anything. */
6873 for (insn = PREV_INSN (loop_start);
6874 insn && (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) >= 0);
6875 insn = PREV_INSN (insn))
6876 ;
6877
6878 if (insn == 0
6879 || GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
6880 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) != NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG)
6881 return;
6882
6883 /* If the last insn of the loop (the end test) was an NE comparison,
6884 we will interpret it as an EQ comparison, since we fell through
f72aed24 6885 the loop. Any equivalences resulting from that comparison are
7afe21cc
RK
6886 therefore not valid and must be invalidated. */
6887 if (last_jump_equiv_class)
6888 for (p = last_jump_equiv_class->first_same_value; p;
6889 p = p->next_same_value)
6890 if (GET_CODE (p->exp) == MEM || GET_CODE (p->exp) == REG
6891 || GET_CODE (p->exp) == SUBREG)
6892 invalidate (p->exp);
6893
6894 /* Process insns starting after LOOP_START until we hit a CALL_INSN or
6895 a CODE_LABEL (we could handle a CALL_INSN, but it isn't worth it).
6896
6897 The only thing we do with SET_DEST is invalidate entries, so we
6898 can safely process each SET in order. It is slightly less efficient
6899 to do so, but we only want to handle the most common cases. */
6900
6901 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (loop_start);
6902 GET_CODE (insn) != CALL_INSN && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL
6903 && ! (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE
6904 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END);
6905 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
6906 {
6907 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
6908 && (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
6909 || GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == CLOBBER))
6910 cse_set_around_loop (PATTERN (insn), insn, loop_start);
6911 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i'
6912 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
6913 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6914 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == SET
6915 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
6916 cse_set_around_loop (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i), insn,
6917 loop_start);
6918 }
6919}
6920\f
8b3686ed
RK
6921/* Variable used for communications between the next two routines. */
6922
6923static struct write_data skipped_writes_memory;
6924
6925/* Process one SET of an insn that was skipped. We ignore CLOBBERs
6926 since they are done elsewhere. This function is called via note_stores. */
6927
6928static void
6929invalidate_skipped_set (dest, set)
6930 rtx set;
6931 rtx dest;
6932{
6933 if (GET_CODE (set) == CLOBBER
6934#ifdef HAVE_cc0
6935 || dest == cc0_rtx
6936#endif
6937 || dest == pc_rtx)
6938 return;
6939
6940 if (GET_CODE (dest) == MEM)
6941 note_mem_written (dest, &skipped_writes_memory);
6942
6943 if (GET_CODE (dest) == REG || GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6944 || (! skipped_writes_memory.all && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (dest)))
6945 invalidate (dest);
6946}
6947
6948/* Invalidate all insns from START up to the end of the function or the
6949 next label. This called when we wish to CSE around a block that is
6950 conditionally executed. */
6951
6952static void
6953invalidate_skipped_block (start)
6954 rtx start;
6955{
6956 rtx insn;
6957 int i;
6958 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
6959 static struct write_data everything = {0, 1, 1, 1};
6960
6961 for (insn = start; insn && GET_CODE (insn) != CODE_LABEL;
6962 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
6963 {
6964 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) != 'i')
6965 continue;
6966
6967 skipped_writes_memory = init;
6968
6969 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CALL_INSN)
6970 {
6971 invalidate_for_call ();
6972 skipped_writes_memory = everything;
6973 }
6974
6975 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), invalidate_skipped_set);
6976 invalidate_from_clobbers (&skipped_writes_memory, PATTERN (insn));
6977 }
6978}
6979\f
7afe21cc
RK
6980/* Used for communication between the following two routines; contains a
6981 value to be checked for modification. */
6982
6983static rtx cse_check_loop_start_value;
6984
6985/* If modifying X will modify the value in CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE,
6986 indicate that fact by setting CSE_CHECK_LOOP_START_VALUE to 0. */
6987
6988static void
6989cse_check_loop_start (x, set)
6990 rtx x;
6991 rtx set;
6992{
6993 if (cse_check_loop_start_value == 0
6994 || GET_CODE (x) == CC0 || GET_CODE (x) == PC)
6995 return;
6996
6997 if ((GET_CODE (x) == MEM && GET_CODE (cse_check_loop_start_value) == MEM)
6998 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, cse_check_loop_start_value))
6999 cse_check_loop_start_value = 0;
7000}
7001
7002/* X is a SET or CLOBBER contained in INSN that was found near the start of
7003 a loop that starts with the label at LOOP_START.
7004
7005 If X is a SET, we see if its SET_SRC is currently in our hash table.
7006 If so, we see if it has a value equal to some register used only in the
7007 loop exit code (as marked by jump.c).
7008
7009 If those two conditions are true, we search backwards from the start of
7010 the loop to see if that same value was loaded into a register that still
7011 retains its value at the start of the loop.
7012
7013 If so, we insert an insn after the load to copy the destination of that
7014 load into the equivalent register and (try to) replace our SET_SRC with that
7015 register.
7016
7017 In any event, we invalidate whatever this SET or CLOBBER modifies. */
7018
7019static void
7020cse_set_around_loop (x, insn, loop_start)
7021 rtx x;
7022 rtx insn;
7023 rtx loop_start;
7024{
7025 rtx p;
7026 struct table_elt *src_elt;
7027 static struct write_data init = {0, 0, 0, 0};
7028 struct write_data writes_memory;
7029
7030 writes_memory = init;
7031
7032 /* If this is a SET, see if we can replace SET_SRC, but ignore SETs that
7033 are setting PC or CC0 or whose SET_SRC is already a register. */
7034 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET
7035 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != CC0
7036 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != REG)
7037 {
7038 src_elt = lookup (SET_SRC (x),
7039 HASH (SET_SRC (x), GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x))),
7040 GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)));
7041
7042 if (src_elt)
7043 for (src_elt = src_elt->first_same_value; src_elt;
7044 src_elt = src_elt->next_same_value)
7045 if (GET_CODE (src_elt->exp) == REG && REG_LOOP_TEST_P (src_elt->exp)
7046 && COST (src_elt->exp) < COST (SET_SRC (x)))
7047 {
7048 rtx p, set;
7049
7050 /* Look for an insn in front of LOOP_START that sets
7051 something in the desired mode to SET_SRC (x) before we hit
7052 a label or CALL_INSN. */
7053
7054 for (p = prev_nonnote_insn (loop_start);
7055 p && GET_CODE (p) != CALL_INSN
7056 && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL;
7057 p = prev_nonnote_insn (p))
7058 if ((set = single_set (p)) != 0
7059 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set)) == REG
7060 && GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) == src_elt->mode
7061 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (set), SET_SRC (x)))
7062 {
7063 /* We now have to ensure that nothing between P
7064 and LOOP_START modified anything referenced in
7065 SET_SRC (x). We know that nothing within the loop
7066 can modify it, or we would have invalidated it in
7067 the hash table. */
7068 rtx q;
7069
7070 cse_check_loop_start_value = SET_SRC (x);
7071 for (q = p; q != loop_start; q = NEXT_INSN (q))
7072 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (q)) == 'i')
7073 note_stores (PATTERN (q), cse_check_loop_start);
7074
7075 /* If nothing was changed and we can replace our
7076 SET_SRC, add an insn after P to copy its destination
7077 to what we will be replacing SET_SRC with. */
7078 if (cse_check_loop_start_value
7079 && validate_change (insn, &SET_SRC (x),
7080 src_elt->exp, 0))
7081 emit_insn_after (gen_move_insn (src_elt->exp,
7082 SET_DEST (set)),
7083 p);
7084 break;
7085 }
7086 }
7087 }
7088
7089 /* Now invalidate anything modified by X. */
7090 note_mem_written (SET_DEST (x), &writes_memory);
7091
7092 if (writes_memory.var)
7093 invalidate_memory (&writes_memory);
7094
7095 /* See comment on similar code in cse_insn for explanation of these tests. */
7096 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == REG || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
7097 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == MEM && ! writes_memory.all
7098 && ! cse_rtx_addr_varies_p (SET_DEST (x))))
7099 invalidate (SET_DEST (x));
7100}
7101\f
7102/* Find the end of INSN's basic block and return its range,
7103 the total number of SETs in all the insns of the block, the last insn of the
7104 block, and the branch path.
7105
7106 The branch path indicates which branches should be followed. If a non-zero
7107 path size is specified, the block should be rescanned and a different set
7108 of branches will be taken. The branch path is only used if
8b3686ed 7109 FLAG_CSE_FOLLOW_JUMPS or FLAG_CSE_SKIP_BLOCKS is non-zero.
7afe21cc
RK
7110
7111 DATA is a pointer to a struct cse_basic_block_data, defined below, that is
7112 used to describe the block. It is filled in with the information about
7113 the current block. The incoming structure's branch path, if any, is used
7114 to construct the output branch path. */
7115
7116/* Define maximum length of a branch path. */
7117
7118#define PATHLENGTH 20
7119
7120struct cse_basic_block_data {
7121 /* Lowest CUID value of insns in block. */
7122 int low_cuid;
7123 /* Highest CUID value of insns in block. */
7124 int high_cuid;
7125 /* Total number of SETs in block. */
7126 int nsets;
7127 /* Last insn in the block. */
7128 rtx last;
7129 /* Size of current branch path, if any. */
7130 int path_size;
7131 /* Current branch path, indicating which branches will be taken. */
7132 struct branch_path {
7133 /* The branch insn. */
7134 rtx branch;
8b3686ed
RK
7135 /* Whether it should be taken or not. AROUND is the same as taken
7136 except that it is used when the destination label is not preceded
7137 by a BARRIER. */
7138 enum taken {TAKEN, NOT_TAKEN, AROUND} status;
7afe21cc
RK
7139 } path[PATHLENGTH];
7140};
7141
7142void
8b3686ed 7143cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, data, follow_jumps, after_loop, skip_blocks)
7afe21cc
RK
7144 rtx insn;
7145 struct cse_basic_block_data *data;
7146 int follow_jumps;
7147 int after_loop;
8b3686ed 7148 int skip_blocks;
7afe21cc
RK
7149{
7150 rtx p = insn, q;
7151 int nsets = 0;
7152 int low_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn), high_cuid = INSN_CUID (insn);
fc3ffe83 7153 rtx next = GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (insn)) == 'i' ? insn : next_real_insn (insn);
7afe21cc
RK
7154 int path_size = data->path_size;
7155 int path_entry = 0;
7156 int i;
7157
7158 /* Update the previous branch path, if any. If the last branch was
7159 previously TAKEN, mark it NOT_TAKEN. If it was previously NOT_TAKEN,
7160 shorten the path by one and look at the previous branch. We know that
7161 at least one branch must have been taken if PATH_SIZE is non-zero. */
7162 while (path_size > 0)
7163 {
8b3686ed 7164 if (data->path[path_size - 1].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc
RK
7165 {
7166 data->path[path_size - 1].status = NOT_TAKEN;
7167 break;
7168 }
7169 else
7170 path_size--;
7171 }
7172
7173 /* Scan to end of this basic block. */
7174 while (p && GET_CODE (p) != CODE_LABEL)
7175 {
7176 /* Don't cse out the end of a loop. This makes a difference
7177 only for the unusual loops that always execute at least once;
7178 all other loops have labels there so we will stop in any case.
7179 Cse'ing out the end of the loop is dangerous because it
7180 might cause an invariant expression inside the loop
7181 to be reused after the end of the loop. This would make it
7182 hard to move the expression out of the loop in loop.c,
7183 especially if it is one of several equivalent expressions
7184 and loop.c would like to eliminate it.
7185
7186 If we are running after loop.c has finished, we can ignore
7187 the NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END. */
7188
7189 if (! after_loop && GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7190 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END)
7191 break;
7192
7193 /* Don't cse over a call to setjmp; on some machines (eg vax)
7194 the regs restored by the longjmp come from
7195 a later time than the setjmp. */
7196 if (GET_CODE (p) == NOTE
7197 && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (p) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7198 break;
7199
7200 /* A PARALLEL can have lots of SETs in it,
7201 especially if it is really an ASM_OPERANDS. */
7202 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (p)) == 'i'
7203 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == PARALLEL)
7204 nsets += XVECLEN (PATTERN (p), 0);
7205 else if (GET_CODE (p) != NOTE)
7206 nsets += 1;
7207
7208 if (INSN_CUID (p) > high_cuid)
8b3686ed 7209 high_cuid = INSN_CUID (p);
7afe21cc 7210 if (INSN_CUID (p) < low_cuid)
8b3686ed 7211 low_cuid = INSN_CUID(p);
7afe21cc
RK
7212
7213 /* See if this insn is in our branch path. If it is and we are to
7214 take it, do so. */
7215 if (path_entry < path_size && data->path[path_entry].branch == p)
7216 {
8b3686ed 7217 if (data->path[path_entry].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc
RK
7218 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7219
7220 /* Point to next entry in path, if any. */
7221 path_entry++;
7222 }
7223
7224 /* If this is a conditional jump, we can follow it if -fcse-follow-jumps
7225 was specified, we haven't reached our maximum path length, there are
7226 insns following the target of the jump, this is the only use of the
8b3686ed
RK
7227 jump label, and the target label is preceded by a BARRIER.
7228
7229 Alternatively, we can follow the jump if it branches around a
7230 block of code and there are no other branches into the block.
7231 In this case invalidate_skipped_block will be called to invalidate any
7232 registers set in the block when following the jump. */
7233
7234 else if ((follow_jumps || skip_blocks) && path_size < PATHLENGTH - 1
7afe21cc
RK
7235 && GET_CODE (p) == JUMP_INSN
7236 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (p)) == SET
7237 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (p))) == IF_THEN_ELSE
7238 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (p)) == 1
7239 && NEXT_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)) != 0)
7240 {
7241 for (q = PREV_INSN (JUMP_LABEL (p)); q; q = PREV_INSN (q))
7242 if ((GET_CODE (q) != NOTE
7243 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
7244 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (q) == NOTE_INSN_SETJMP)
7245 && (GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL || LABEL_NUSES (q) != 0))
7246 break;
7247
7248 /* If we ran into a BARRIER, this code is an extension of the
7249 basic block when the branch is taken. */
8b3686ed 7250 if (follow_jumps && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) == BARRIER)
7afe21cc
RK
7251 {
7252 /* Don't allow ourself to keep walking around an
7253 always-executed loop. */
fc3ffe83
RK
7254 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7255 {
7256 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7257 continue;
7258 }
7afe21cc
RK
7259
7260 /* Similarly, don't put a branch in our path more than once. */
7261 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7262 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7263 break;
7264
7265 if (i != path_entry)
7266 break;
7267
7268 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7269 data->path[path_entry++].status = TAKEN;
7270
7271 /* This branch now ends our path. It was possible that we
7272 didn't see this branch the last time around (when the
7273 insn in front of the target was a JUMP_INSN that was
7274 turned into a no-op). */
7275 path_size = path_entry;
7276
7277 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7278 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7279 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7280 }
8b3686ed
RK
7281 /* Detect a branch around a block of code. */
7282 else if (skip_blocks && q != 0 && GET_CODE (q) != CODE_LABEL)
7283 {
7284 register rtx tmp;
7285
fc3ffe83
RK
7286 if (next_real_insn (q) == next)
7287 {
7288 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7289 continue;
7290 }
8b3686ed
RK
7291
7292 for (i = 0; i < path_entry; i++)
7293 if (data->path[i].branch == p)
7294 break;
7295
7296 if (i != path_entry)
7297 break;
7298
7299 /* This is no_labels_between_p (p, q) with an added check for
7300 reaching the end of a function (in case Q precedes P). */
7301 for (tmp = NEXT_INSN (p); tmp && tmp != q; tmp = NEXT_INSN (tmp))
7302 if (GET_CODE (tmp) == CODE_LABEL)
7303 break;
7304
7305 if (tmp == q)
7306 {
7307 data->path[path_entry].branch = p;
7308 data->path[path_entry++].status = AROUND;
7309
7310 path_size = path_entry;
7311
7312 p = JUMP_LABEL (p);
7313 /* Mark block so we won't scan it again later. */
7314 PUT_MODE (NEXT_INSN (p), QImode);
7315 }
7316 }
7afe21cc 7317 }
7afe21cc
RK
7318 p = NEXT_INSN (p);
7319 }
7320
7321 data->low_cuid = low_cuid;
7322 data->high_cuid = high_cuid;
7323 data->nsets = nsets;
7324 data->last = p;
7325
7326 /* If all jumps in the path are not taken, set our path length to zero
7327 so a rescan won't be done. */
7328 for (i = path_size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8b3686ed 7329 if (data->path[i].status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc
RK
7330 break;
7331
7332 if (i == -1)
7333 data->path_size = 0;
7334 else
7335 data->path_size = path_size;
7336
7337 /* End the current branch path. */
7338 data->path[path_size].branch = 0;
7339}
7340\f
7341static rtx cse_basic_block ();
7342
7343/* Perform cse on the instructions of a function.
7344 F is the first instruction.
7345 NREGS is one plus the highest pseudo-reg number used in the instruction.
7346
7347 AFTER_LOOP is 1 if this is the cse call done after loop optimization
7348 (only if -frerun-cse-after-loop).
7349
7350 Returns 1 if jump_optimize should be redone due to simplifications
7351 in conditional jump instructions. */
7352
7353int
7354cse_main (f, nregs, after_loop, file)
7355 rtx f;
7356 int nregs;
7357 int after_loop;
7358 FILE *file;
7359{
7360 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
7361 register rtx insn = f;
7362 register int i;
7363
7364 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
7365 constant_pool_entries_cost = 0;
7366 val.path_size = 0;
7367
7368 init_recog ();
7369
7370 max_reg = nregs;
7371
7372 all_minus_one = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7373 consec_ints = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7374
7375 for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
7376 {
7377 all_minus_one[i] = -1;
7378 consec_ints[i] = i;
7379 }
7380
7381 reg_next_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7382 reg_prev_eqv = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7383 reg_qty = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7384 reg_in_table = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7385 reg_tick = (int *) alloca (nregs * sizeof (int));
7386
7387 /* Discard all the free elements of the previous function
7388 since they are allocated in the temporarily obstack. */
7389 bzero (table, sizeof table);
7390 free_element_chain = 0;
7391 n_elements_made = 0;
7392
7393 /* Find the largest uid. */
7394
7395 i = get_max_uid ();
7396 uid_cuid = (short *) alloca ((i + 1) * sizeof (short));
7397 bzero (uid_cuid, (i + 1) * sizeof (short));
7398
7399 /* Compute the mapping from uids to cuids.
7400 CUIDs are numbers assigned to insns, like uids,
7401 except that cuids increase monotonically through the code.
7402 Don't assign cuids to line-number NOTEs, so that the distance in cuids
7403 between two insns is not affected by -g. */
7404
7405 for (insn = f, i = 0; insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7406 {
7407 if (GET_CODE (insn) != NOTE
7408 || NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (insn) < 0)
7409 INSN_CUID (insn) = ++i;
7410 else
7411 /* Give a line number note the same cuid as preceding insn. */
7412 INSN_CUID (insn) = i;
7413 }
7414
7415 /* Initialize which registers are clobbered by calls. */
7416
7417 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call);
7418
7419 for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
7420 if ((call_used_regs[i]
7421 /* Used to check !fixed_regs[i] here, but that isn't safe;
7422 fixed regs are still call-clobbered, and sched can get
7423 confused if they can "live across calls".
7424
7425 The frame pointer is always preserved across calls. The arg
7426 pointer is if it is fixed. The stack pointer usually is, unless
7427 RETURN_POPS_ARGS, in which case an explicit CLOBBER
7428 will be present. If we are generating PIC code, the PIC offset
7429 table register is preserved across calls. */
7430
7431 && i != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
7432 && i != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
7433#if ARG_POINTER_REGNUM != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
7434 && ! (i == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[i])
7435#endif
7436#ifdef PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
7437 && ! (i == PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM && flag_pic)
7438#endif
7439 )
7440 || global_regs[i])
7441 SET_HARD_REG_BIT (regs_invalidated_by_call, i);
7442
7443 /* Loop over basic blocks.
7444 Compute the maximum number of qty's needed for each basic block
7445 (which is 2 for each SET). */
7446 insn = f;
7447 while (insn)
7448 {
8b3686ed
RK
7449 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, flag_cse_follow_jumps, after_loop,
7450 flag_cse_skip_blocks);
7afe21cc
RK
7451
7452 /* If this basic block was already processed or has no sets, skip it. */
7453 if (val.nsets == 0 || GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
7454 {
7455 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
7456 insn = (val.last ? NEXT_INSN (val.last) : 0);
7457 val.path_size = 0;
7458 continue;
7459 }
7460
7461 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
7462 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
7463 max_qty = val.nsets * 2;
7464
7465 if (file)
7466 fprintf (file, ";; Processing block from %d to %d, %d sets.\n",
7467 INSN_UID (insn), val.last ? INSN_UID (val.last) : 0,
7468 val.nsets);
7469
7470 /* Make MAX_QTY bigger to give us room to optimize
7471 past the end of this basic block, if that should prove useful. */
7472 if (max_qty < 500)
7473 max_qty = 500;
7474
7475 max_qty += max_reg;
7476
7477 /* If this basic block is being extended by following certain jumps,
7478 (see `cse_end_of_basic_block'), we reprocess the code from the start.
7479 Otherwise, we start after this basic block. */
7480 if (val.path_size > 0)
7481 cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, 0);
7482 else
7483 {
7484 int old_cse_jumps_altered = cse_jumps_altered;
7485 rtx temp;
7486
7487 /* When cse changes a conditional jump to an unconditional
7488 jump, we want to reprocess the block, since it will give
7489 us a new branch path to investigate. */
7490 cse_jumps_altered = 0;
7491 temp = cse_basic_block (insn, val.last, val.path, ! after_loop);
8b3686ed
RK
7492 if (cse_jumps_altered == 0
7493 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
7afe21cc
RK
7494 insn = temp;
7495
7496 cse_jumps_altered |= old_cse_jumps_altered;
7497 }
7498
7499#ifdef USE_C_ALLOCA
7500 alloca (0);
7501#endif
7502 }
7503
7504 /* Tell refers_to_mem_p that qty_const info is not available. */
7505 qty_const = 0;
7506
7507 if (max_elements_made < n_elements_made)
7508 max_elements_made = n_elements_made;
7509
7510 return cse_jumps_altered;
7511}
7512
7513/* Process a single basic block. FROM and TO and the limits of the basic
7514 block. NEXT_BRANCH points to the branch path when following jumps or
7515 a null path when not following jumps.
7516
7517 AROUND_LOOP is non-zero if we are to try to cse around to the start of a
7518 loop. This is true when we are being called for the last time on a
7519 block and this CSE pass is before loop.c. */
7520
7521static rtx
7522cse_basic_block (from, to, next_branch, around_loop)
7523 register rtx from, to;
7524 struct branch_path *next_branch;
7525 int around_loop;
7526{
7527 register rtx insn;
7528 int to_usage = 0;
7529 int in_libcall_block = 0;
7530
7531 /* Each of these arrays is undefined before max_reg, so only allocate
7532 the space actually needed and adjust the start below. */
7533
7534 qty_first_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7535 qty_last_reg = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7536 qty_mode= (enum machine_mode *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum machine_mode));
7537 qty_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7538 qty_const_insn = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7539 qty_comparison_code
7540 = (enum rtx_code *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (enum rtx_code));
7541 qty_comparison_qty = (int *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (int));
7542 qty_comparison_const = (rtx *) alloca ((max_qty - max_reg) * sizeof (rtx));
7543
7544 qty_first_reg -= max_reg;
7545 qty_last_reg -= max_reg;
7546 qty_mode -= max_reg;
7547 qty_const -= max_reg;
7548 qty_const_insn -= max_reg;
7549 qty_comparison_code -= max_reg;
7550 qty_comparison_qty -= max_reg;
7551 qty_comparison_const -= max_reg;
7552
7553 new_basic_block ();
7554
7555 /* TO might be a label. If so, protect it from being deleted. */
7556 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
7557 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
7558
7559 for (insn = from; insn != to; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
7560 {
7561 register enum rtx_code code;
7562
7563 /* See if this is a branch that is part of the path. If so, and it is
7564 to be taken, do so. */
7565 if (next_branch->branch == insn)
7566 {
8b3686ed
RK
7567 enum taken status = next_branch++->status;
7568 if (status != NOT_TAKEN)
7afe21cc 7569 {
8b3686ed
RK
7570 if (status == TAKEN)
7571 record_jump_equiv (insn, 1);
7572 else
7573 invalidate_skipped_block (NEXT_INSN (insn));
7574
7afe21cc
RK
7575 /* Set the last insn as the jump insn; it doesn't affect cc0.
7576 Then follow this branch. */
7577#ifdef HAVE_cc0
7578 prev_insn_cc0 = 0;
7579#endif
7580 prev_insn = insn;
7581 insn = JUMP_LABEL (insn);
7582 continue;
7583 }
7584 }
7585
7586 code = GET_CODE (insn);
7587 if (GET_MODE (insn) == QImode)
7588 PUT_MODE (insn, VOIDmode);
7589
7590 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
7591 {
7592 /* Process notes first so we have all notes in canonical forms when
7593 looking for duplicate operations. */
7594
7595 if (REG_NOTES (insn))
7596 REG_NOTES (insn) = cse_process_notes (REG_NOTES (insn), 0);
7597
7598 /* Track when we are inside in LIBCALL block. Inside such a block,
7599 we do not want to record destinations. The last insn of a
7600 LIBCALL block is not considered to be part of the block, since
830a38ee 7601 its destination is the result of the block and hence should be
7afe21cc
RK
7602 recorded. */
7603
7604 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, 0))
7605 in_libcall_block = 1;
7606 else if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, 0))
7607 in_libcall_block = 0;
7608
7609 cse_insn (insn, in_libcall_block);
7610 }
7611
7612 /* If INSN is now an unconditional jump, skip to the end of our
7613 basic block by pretending that we just did the last insn in the
7614 basic block. If we are jumping to the end of our block, show
7615 that we can have one usage of TO. */
7616
7617 if (simplejump_p (insn))
7618 {
7619 if (to == 0)
7620 return 0;
7621
7622 if (JUMP_LABEL (insn) == to)
7623 to_usage = 1;
7624
6a5293dc
RS
7625 /* Maybe TO was deleted because the jump is unconditional.
7626 If so, there is nothing left in this basic block. */
7627 /* ??? Perhaps it would be smarter to set TO
7628 to whatever follows this insn,
7629 and pretend the basic block had always ended here. */
7630 if (INSN_DELETED_P (to))
7631 break;
7632
7afe21cc
RK
7633 insn = PREV_INSN (to);
7634 }
7635
7636 /* See if it is ok to keep on going past the label
7637 which used to end our basic block. Remember that we incremented
d45cf215 7638 the count of that label, so we decrement it here. If we made
7afe21cc
RK
7639 a jump unconditional, TO_USAGE will be one; in that case, we don't
7640 want to count the use in that jump. */
7641
7642 if (to != 0 && NEXT_INSN (insn) == to
7643 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL && --LABEL_NUSES (to) == to_usage)
7644 {
7645 struct cse_basic_block_data val;
7646
7647 insn = NEXT_INSN (to);
7648
7649 if (LABEL_NUSES (to) == 0)
7650 delete_insn (to);
7651
7652 /* Find the end of the following block. Note that we won't be
7653 following branches in this case. If TO was the last insn
7654 in the function, we are done. Similarly, if we deleted the
d45cf215 7655 insn after TO, it must have been because it was preceded by
7afe21cc
RK
7656 a BARRIER. In that case, we are done with this block because it
7657 has no continuation. */
7658
7659 if (insn == 0 || INSN_DELETED_P (insn))
7660 return 0;
7661
7662 to_usage = 0;
7663 val.path_size = 0;
8b3686ed 7664 cse_end_of_basic_block (insn, &val, 0, 0, 0);
7afe21cc
RK
7665
7666 /* If the tables we allocated have enough space left
7667 to handle all the SETs in the next basic block,
7668 continue through it. Otherwise, return,
7669 and that block will be scanned individually. */
7670 if (val.nsets * 2 + next_qty > max_qty)
7671 break;
7672
7673 cse_basic_block_start = val.low_cuid;
7674 cse_basic_block_end = val.high_cuid;
7675 to = val.last;
7676
7677 /* Prevent TO from being deleted if it is a label. */
7678 if (to != 0 && GET_CODE (to) == CODE_LABEL)
7679 ++LABEL_NUSES (to);
7680
7681 /* Back up so we process the first insn in the extension. */
7682 insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
7683 }
7684 }
7685
7686 if (next_qty > max_qty)
7687 abort ();
7688
7689 /* If we are running before loop.c, we stopped on a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END, and
7690 the previous insn is the only insn that branches to the head of a loop,
7691 we can cse into the loop. Don't do this if we changed the jump
7692 structure of a loop unless we aren't going to be following jumps. */
7693
8b3686ed
RK
7694 if ((cse_jumps_altered == 0
7695 || (flag_cse_follow_jumps == 0 && flag_cse_skip_blocks == 0))
7afe21cc
RK
7696 && around_loop && to != 0
7697 && GET_CODE (to) == NOTE && NOTE_LINE_NUMBER (to) == NOTE_INSN_LOOP_END
7698 && GET_CODE (PREV_INSN (to)) == JUMP_INSN
7699 && JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)) != 0
7700 && LABEL_NUSES (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to))) == 1)
7701 cse_around_loop (JUMP_LABEL (PREV_INSN (to)));
7702
7703 return to ? NEXT_INSN (to) : 0;
7704}
7705\f
7706/* Count the number of times registers are used (not set) in X.
7707 COUNTS is an array in which we accumulate the count, INCR is how much
7708 we count each register usage. */
7709
7710static void
7711count_reg_usage (x, counts, incr)
7712 rtx x;
7713 int *counts;
7714 int incr;
7715{
7716 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7717 char *fmt;
7718 int i, j;
7719
7720 switch (code)
7721 {
7722 case REG:
7723 counts[REGNO (x)] += incr;
7724 return;
7725
7726 case PC:
7727 case CC0:
7728 case CONST:
7729 case CONST_INT:
7730 case CONST_DOUBLE:
7731 case SYMBOL_REF:
7732 case LABEL_REF:
7733 case CLOBBER:
7734 return;
7735
7736 case SET:
7737 /* Unless we are setting a REG, count everything in SET_DEST. */
7738 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != REG)
7739 count_reg_usage (SET_DEST (x), counts, incr);
7740 count_reg_usage (SET_SRC (x), counts, incr);
7741 return;
7742
7743 case INSN:
7744 case JUMP_INSN:
7745 case CALL_INSN:
7746 count_reg_usage (PATTERN (x), counts, incr);
7747
7748 /* Things used in a REG_EQUAL note aren't dead since loop may try to
7749 use them. */
7750
7751 if (REG_NOTES (x))
7752 count_reg_usage (REG_NOTES (x), counts, incr);
7753 return;
7754
7755 case EXPR_LIST:
7756 case INSN_LIST:
7757 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (x) == REG_EQUAL)
7758 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 0), counts, incr);
7759 if (XEXP (x, 1))
7760 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, 1), counts, incr);
7761 return;
7762 }
7763
7764 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
7765 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7766 {
7767 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
7768 count_reg_usage (XEXP (x, i), counts, incr);
7769 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
7770 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
7771 count_reg_usage (XVECEXP (x, i, j), counts, incr);
7772 }
7773}
7774\f
7775/* Scan all the insns and delete any that are dead; i.e., they store a register
7776 that is never used or they copy a register to itself.
7777
7778 This is used to remove insns made obviously dead by cse. It improves the
7779 heuristics in loop since it won't try to move dead invariants out of loops
7780 or make givs for dead quantities. The remaining passes of the compilation
7781 are also sped up. */
7782
7783void
7784delete_dead_from_cse (insns, nreg)
7785 rtx insns;
7786 int nreg;
7787{
7788 int *counts = (int *) alloca (nreg * sizeof (int));
77fa0940 7789 rtx insn, prev;
d45cf215 7790 rtx tem;
7afe21cc 7791 int i;
e4890d45 7792 int in_libcall = 0;
7afe21cc
RK
7793
7794 /* First count the number of times each register is used. */
7795 bzero (counts, sizeof (int) * nreg);
7796 for (insn = next_real_insn (insns); insn; insn = next_real_insn (insn))
7797 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, 1);
7798
7799 /* Go from the last insn to the first and delete insns that only set unused
7800 registers or copy a register to itself. As we delete an insn, remove
7801 usage counts for registers it uses. */
77fa0940 7802 for (insn = prev_real_insn (get_last_insn ()); insn; insn = prev)
7afe21cc
RK
7803 {
7804 int live_insn = 0;
7805
77fa0940
RK
7806 prev = prev_real_insn (insn);
7807
e4890d45 7808 /* Don't delete any insns that are part of a libcall block.
77fa0940
RK
7809 Flow or loop might get confused if we did that. Remember
7810 that we are scanning backwards. */
7811 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_RETVAL, 0))
e4890d45
RS
7812 in_libcall = 1;
7813
7814 if (in_libcall)
7815 live_insn = 1;
7816 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
7afe21cc
RK
7817 {
7818 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == REG
7819 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
7820 ;
7821
d45cf215
RS
7822#ifdef HAVE_cc0
7823 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) == CC0
7824 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn)))
7825 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
7826 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
7827 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
7828 ;
7829#endif
7afe21cc
RK
7830 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) != REG
7831 || REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn))) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7832 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (insn)))] != 0
7833 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn))))
7834 live_insn = 1;
7835 }
7836 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL)
7837 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
7838 {
7839 rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
7840
7841 if (GET_CODE (elt) == SET)
7842 {
7843 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == REG
7844 && SET_DEST (elt) == SET_SRC (elt))
7845 ;
7846
d45cf215
RS
7847#ifdef HAVE_cc0
7848 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) == CC0
7849 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt))
7850 && ((tem = next_nonnote_insn (insn)) == 0
7851 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (tem)) != 'i'
7852 || ! reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, PATTERN (tem))))
7853 ;
7854#endif
7afe21cc
RK
7855 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (elt)) != REG
7856 || REGNO (SET_DEST (elt)) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
7857 || counts[REGNO (SET_DEST (elt))] != 0
7858 || side_effects_p (SET_SRC (elt)))
7859 live_insn = 1;
7860 }
7861 else if (GET_CODE (elt) != CLOBBER && GET_CODE (elt) != USE)
7862 live_insn = 1;
7863 }
7864 else
7865 live_insn = 1;
7866
7867 /* If this is a dead insn, delete it and show registers in it aren't
e4890d45 7868 being used. */
7afe21cc 7869
e4890d45 7870 if (! live_insn)
7afe21cc
RK
7871 {
7872 count_reg_usage (insn, counts, -1);
77fa0940 7873 delete_insn (insn);
7afe21cc 7874 }
e4890d45 7875
77fa0940 7876 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_LIBCALL, 0))
e4890d45 7877 in_libcall = 0;
7afe21cc
RK
7878 }
7879}